SLR Digital Camera
K-500
Operating Manual
To ensure the best performance from your camera, please read
the Operating Manual before using the camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX K-500 Digital Camera. Please read this manual
before using the camera in order to get the most out of all the features and functions. Keep
this manual safe, as it can be a valuable tool in helping you to understand all the camera's
capabilities.
Lenses you can use
In general, lenses that can be used with this camera are DA, DA L, D FA and FA J lenses
and lenses that have an s position on the aperture ring. To use any other lens or accessory,
see p.54 and p.259.
Regarding copyrights
Images taken with the K-500 that are for anything other than personal enjoyment cannot be
used without permission according to the rights as specified in the Copyright Act. Please take
care, as there are cases where limitations are placed on taking pictures even for personal
enjoyment during demonstrations, performances or of items on display. Images taken with
the purpose of obtaining copyrights also cannot be used outside the scope of use of the
copyright as laid out in the Copyright Act, and care should be taken here also.
Regarding trademarks
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries. Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
Intel, Intel Core, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other
countries.
SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Eye-Fi, the Eye-Fi logo and Eye-Fi connected are trademarks of Eye-Fi, Inc.
This product includes DNG technology under license by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The DNG logo is either a registered trademark or trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated
in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This product supports PRINT Image Matching III. PRINT Image Matching enabled digital still
cameras, printers and software help photographers to produce images more faithful to their
intentions. Some functions are not available on printers that are not PRINT Image Matching
III compliant.
Copyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved. PRINT Image Matching is a
trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. The PRINT Image Matching logo is a trademark of
Seiko Epson Corporation.
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of a
consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in
encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video
provider licensed to provide AVC video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other
use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
To users of this camera
• Do not use or store this camera in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong
electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic
fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the
monitor, damage the stored data, or affect the camera’s internal circuitry and cause
camera misoperation.
• The liquid crystal panel used for the monitor is manufactured using extremely high
precision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you
should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate
when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen of the monitor in this
manual are different from the actual ones.
• In this manual, SD Memory Cards, SDHC Memory Cards, SDXC Memory Cards and
Eye-Fi Cards are referred to as “SD Memory Cards”.
• In this manual, the generic term “computer(s)” refers to either a Windows PC or a
Macintosh.
• This camera can be powered with the rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109, the
AA battery holder D-BH109 with four AA batteries, or an optional AC adapter. The
power supply provided with this camera varies depending on the country or region
where the camera was purchased. This manual is mainly written assuming that the
camera is used with the rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109.
• In this manual, both D-LI109 and D-BH109 are referred to as the “battery” unless
otherwise stated. Except this, the generic term “battery(ies)” refers to any type of
batteries used for this camera and its accessories.
For Using Your Camera Safely
We have paid close attention to the safety of this camera. When using this camera,
we request your special attention regarding items marked with the following
symbols.
This symbol indicates that ignoring this item could cause serious
personal injuries.
Warning
This symbol indicates that ignoring this item could cause minor
Caution
or medium personal injuries, or loss of property.
About the Camera
Warning
• Do not disassemble or modify the camera. High voltage areas are present inside the
camera, with the risk of electric shock.
• If the camera interior is exposed due to dropping or otherwise damaging the camera,
never touch the exposed portion. There is a risk of electric shock.
• Do not aim the camera at the sun or other strong light sources when taking pictures
or leave the camera sitting in direct sunlight with the lens cap off. Doing so may cause
the camera to malfunction or cause a fire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
• Do not look at the sun or other strong light sources through the lens. Doing so may
lead to a loss of eyesight or cause vision to be impaired.
• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop use
immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your nearest
PENTAX Service Center. Continued use can cause a fire or electrical shock.
Caution
• Do not place your finger over the flash when discharging the flash. You may burn
yourself.
• Do not cover the flash with clothing when discharging the flash. Discoloration may
occur.
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use. There is a risk of low temperature
burns when holding such portions for long periods.
• Should the monitor be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be careful not
to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin or in your eyes or mouth.
• Depending on your individual factors or physical condition, the use of the camera may
cause itching, rashes or blisters. In case of any abnormality, stop using the camera
and get medical attention immediately.
About the Battery Charger and AC Adapter
Warning
• Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for this
camera, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger or AC adapter
not exclusive to this camera, or using the exclusive battery charger or AC adapter with
an unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric shock, or camera
breakdown. The specified voltage is 100 - 240V AC.
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other abnormality
occurs, immediately discontinue using and consult a PENTAX Service Center.
Continued use can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX Service Center.
Continued use can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If you see a lightning flash or hear thunder during use of the battery charger or AC
adapter, unplug the power plug and discontinue use. Continued use can cause
damage to the product, fire or electrical shock.
• Wipe off the power plug if it should become covered with dust. Accumulated dust may
cause a fire.
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only CSA/UL certified power supply cord set, cord
is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end with a molded-on
male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA configuration), and the other is
provided with a molded-on female connector body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial
type configuration) or the equivalent.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Caution
• Do not place or drop heavy objects on or forcefully bend the AC plug cord. Doing so
may damage the cord. Should the AC plug cord be damaged, consult a PENTAX
Service Center.
• Do not touch or short-circuit the terminal area of the AC plug cord while the cord is
plugged in.
• Do not handle the power plug with wet hands. This can cause an electric shock.
• Do not drop the product, or subject it to violent impact. This can cause the product
breakdown.
• Do not use the battery charger D-BC109 to charge batteries other than the
rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109. Attempting to charge other types of
batteries may cause an explosion or heating, or may damage the battery charger.
About the Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery
Warning
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub
them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.
Caution
• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may cause an
explosion or fire.
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an explosion
or leakage.
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins to
smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and - contacts of the
battery.
• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an explosion
or fire.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothing, it may
cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.
• Precautions for D-LI109 Battery Usage:
USE SPECIFIED CHARGER ONLY.
-
-
-
-
DO NOT INCINERATE.
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.
DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT.
DO NOT EXPOSE TO HIGH TEMP. (140°F/60°C)
About the Usage of AA Batteries
Warning
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub
them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Caution
• When using the AA battery holder D-BH109, four AA alkaline, AA lithium or AA Ni-MH
batteries can be used. Do not use batteries other than those specified here. Using
other types of batteries may cause the camera to function poorly, or the batteries may
explode or cause a fire.
• The batteries should be inserted correctly, observing (+) and (-) marks on the
batteries. Inserting the batteries incorrectly may cause an explosion or fire.
• When replacing the batteries, do not combine different brands, types or capacities.
Also, do not combine old batteries with new ones. Inserting the batteries incorrectly
may cause an explosion or fire.
• Do not short the batteries or dispose of the batteries in fire. Do not disassemble the
batteries. The batteries could explode or catch fire.
• Do not charge any batteries other than rechargeable Ni-MH batteries. The batteries
could explode or catch fire. AA batteries for use with this camera other than Ni-MH
batteries cannot be charged.
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the batteries while the power is on.
• Remove the batteries when you do not plan to use the camera for a long time. The
batteries may leak.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes, it may
cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.
• Remove the batteries from the camera immediately if they become hot or begin to
smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.
Keep the Camera and its Accessories out of the Reach of
Small Children
Warning
• Do not place the camera and its accessories within the reach of small children.
1. If the product falls or is operated accidentally, it may cause serious personal
injuries.
2. Wrapping the strap around a neck may cause suffocation.
3. To avoid the risk of a small accessory such as the battery or SD Memory Cards
from being swallowed by mistake, keep them out of the reach of small children.
Seek medical attention immediately if an accessory is accidentally swallowed.
Care to be Taken During Handling
Before Using Your Camera
• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network listing that is included in the
package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still working
properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a wedding or when
traveling). Contents of the recording cannot be guaranteed if recording, playback or
transferring your data to a computer, etc. is not possible due to a malfunction of your
camera or recording media (SD Memory Card), etc.
About the Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery and Battery
Charger
• To keep the battery in optimum condition, avoid storing it in a fully charged state or in
high temperatures.
• If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the battery will
over-discharge and shorten the battery’s life.
• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.
• The AC plug cord provided with this camera or included with the battery charger kit
K-BC109 is developed exclusively for the battery charger D-BC109. Do not use it with
other devices.
Precautions on Carrying and Using Your Camera
• Do not subject the camera to high temperatures or high humidity. Do not leave the
camera in a vehicle, as the temperature can get very high.
• Do not subject the camera to strong vibrations, shocks, or pressure. Use a cushion to
protect the camera from vibrations of motorcycles, automobiles, or ships.
• The temperature range for camera use is -10°C to 40°C (14°F to 104°F).
• The monitor may appear black at high temperatures, but will return to normal at
normal temperatures.
• The monitor may respond more slowly at low temperatures. This is due to liquid
crystal properties, and is not a malfunction.
• Sudden temperature changes will cause condensation on the inside and outside of
the camera. Place the camera in your bag or a plastic bag, and remove it after
temperature of the camera and surroundings are equalized.
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salt. These could
cause the camera to breakdown. Wipe the camera to dry off any rain or water drops.
• Do not press the monitor with excessive force. This could cause it to break or
malfunction.
• Be careful not to overtighten the screw in the tripod socket when using a tripod.
Cleaning Your Camera
• Do not clean the camera with organic solvents such as thinner, alcohol, or benzine.
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens or viewfinder. Never use a
spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.
• Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning of the CMOS
sensor. (This will involve a fee.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
• Periodic inspections are recommended every one to two years to maintain high
performance.
Storing Your Camera
• Do not store the camera with preservatives or chemicals. Storage in high
temperatures and high humidity can cause mold to grow on the camera. Remove the
camera from its case and store it in a dry and well-ventilated place.
• Avoid using or storing the camera where it may be exposed to static electricity or
electrical interference.
• Avoid using or storing the camera in direct sunlight or in locations where it may be
exposed to rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.
About SD Memory Cards
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a write-
protect switch. Setting the switch to LOCK
prevents new data from being recorded on the
card, the stored data from being deleted, and the
card from being formatted by the camera or
computer.
Write-protect
switch
•
The SD Memory Card may be hot when removing
the card immediately after using the camera.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn off the power while the card is being
accessed. This may cause the data to be lost or the card to be damaged.
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it away from
water and store away from high temperatures.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be damaged and
become unusable.
•
Data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances. We do
not accept any liability for data that is deleted if
1. the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.
2. the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.
3. the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.
4. the SD Memory Card or the battery is removed while the card is being accessed.
• If the SD Memory Card is not used for a long time, the data on the card may become
unreadable. Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on a computer.
• Format new SD Memory Cards. Also format SD Memory Cards previously used with
other cameras or devices.
• Please note that deleting data stored on an SD Memory Card, or formatting an SD
Memory Card does not completely erase the original data. Deleted data can
sometimes be recovered using commercially available software. If you are going to
discard, give away or sell your SD Memory Card, you should ensure that the data on
the card is completely deleted or the card itself is destroyed if it contains any personal
or sensitive information.
• The data on your SD Memory Card should be managed at your own risk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
About Eye-Fi Cards
• An SD Memory Card with a built-in wireless LAN ("Eye-Fi card") can be used with this
camera.
• Use of an access point and an Internet connection are required for transferring
images via wireless LAN. For details, refer to the Eye-Fi website. (http://www.eye.fi)
• Use Eye-Fi cards which have been updated to the newest firmware.
• Set [Eye-Fi] to [Off], or do not use an Eye-Fi card in a location where the use of
wireless LAN devices is restricted or prohibited, such as airplanes.
• Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the country in which the card was purchased. Please
observe all local laws governing Eye-Fi card usage.
• This camera features a function to enable/disable the communication function of the
Eye-Fi card, however, we do not guarantee the operability of all Eye-Fi card functions.
• Refer to the Eye-Fi card manual for details on how to use the card.
• Please contact the Eye-Fi card manufacturer regarding any malfunctions or problems
concerning Eye-Fi cards.
Regarding User Registration
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the user registration, which can
be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX website.
Refer to p.237 for details. Thank you for your cooperation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Contents
For Using Your Camera Safely............................................................ 1
Care to be Taken During Handling ...................................................... 4
Contents............................................................................................... 9
Composition of the Operating Manual ............................................... 15
Before Using Your Camera
17
Checking the Contents of the Package......................................18
Names and Functions of the Working Parts..............................19
Capture Mode .................................................................................... 20
Playback Mode .................................................................................. 22
Monitor Display .................................................................................. 24
Viewfinder .......................................................................................... 35
How to Change Function Settings..............................................37
Using the Direct Keys ........................................................................ 37
Using the Control Panel..................................................................... 38
Using the Menus................................................................................ 39
Getting Started
Attaching the Strap ......................................................................44
Inserting the Battery.....................................................................45
Using the Lithium-ion Battery............................................................. 45
Using the AA Batteries....................................................................... 48
Using the AC Adapter ........................................................................ 50
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card...................................52
Attaching a Lens...........................................................................54
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter................................................56
Turning the Camera On and Off..................................................57
Initial Settings...............................................................................58
Setting the Display Language............................................................ 58
Setting the Date and Time ................................................................. 60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Basic Operations
63
Basic Shooting Operation ...........................................................64
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings.............................. 64
Using the Built-in Flash ...............................................................68
Setting the Flash Mode...................................................................... 68
Using the Built-in Flash...................................................................... 71
Reviewing Images ........................................................................72
Playing Back Images ......................................................................... 72
Deleting a Single Image..................................................................... 73
Shooting Functions
75
How to Operate the Shooting Functions....................................76
Direct Keys Setting Items................................................................... 76
Rec. Mode Menu Items...................................................................... 77
Movie Menu Items.............................................................................. 79
Custom Setting Menu Items............................................................... 80
Selecting the Appropriate Capture Mode...................................82
Auto Picture Modes............................................................................ 83
Exposure Modes................................................................................ 86
Setting the Exposure....................................................................87
Setting the Sensitivity......................................................................... 87
Changing the Exposure Mode ........................................................... 89
Adjusting the Exposure...................................................................... 92
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting (AE Lock)............................. 96
Selecting the Metering Method .......................................................... 97
Reducing the Image Noise (Noise Reduction)................................... 98
Focusing......................................................................................101
Setting the Focus Mode................................................................... 101
Selecting the Focusing Point (AF Point) .......................................... 104
Setting the Contrast AF during Live View ........................................ 106
Checking the Focus ......................................................................... 109
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)................................ 110
AF Fine Adjustment ......................................................................... 112
Checking the Depth of Field (Preview).....................................114
Displaying the Optical Preview ........................................................ 114
Displaying the Digital Preview.......................................................... 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent Camera
Shake...........................................................................................116
Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction Function..................... 116
Shooting with the Self-timer............................................................. 118
Shooting with a Remote Control Unit (Optional).............................. 120
Taking Pictures Continuously...................................................122
Continuous Shooting........................................................................ 122
Interval Shooting.............................................................................. 124
Multi-exposure ................................................................................. 127
Recording Movies.......................................................................129
Changing the Settings for Movie Recording .................................... 129
Recording Movies ............................................................................ 131
Interval Movie................................................................................... 133
Playing Back Movies........................................................................ 135
Editing Movies.................................................................................. 137
Shooting Settings
139
Setting a File Format..................................................................140
File Format....................................................................................... 141
JPEG Recorded Pixels .................................................................... 141
JPEG Quality ................................................................................... 142
Color Space ..................................................................................... 142
Setting the White Balance .........................................................143
Adjusting the White Balance Manually............................................. 145
Adjusting the White Balance with Color Temperature ..................... 147
Correcting Images......................................................................148
Brightness Adjustment..................................................................... 148
High Dynamic Range Image Capture .............................................. 149
Lens Correction................................................................................ 151
Composition Adjustment.................................................................. 153
Setting the Image Finishing Tone.............................................155
Custom Image.................................................................................. 155
Digital Filter...................................................................................... 159
Customizing the Button/E-dial Functions................................162
Setting the E-dials Operation........................................................... 162
Setting the V/Y Button Operation............................................. 165
Setting the =/L Button Operation.......................................... 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Saving Frequently Used Settings .............................................168
Saving the Settings.......................................................................... 168
Checking the Saved USER Settings................................................ 171
Using Saved USER Settings............................................................ 171
Resetting to Default Settings ........................................................... 172
Playback Functions and Image Editing
173
How to Operate the Playback/Edit Functions..........................174
Playback Mode Palette Items .......................................................... 174
Playback Menu Items....................................................................... 175
Setting the Playback Display Method.......................................176
Selecting the Playback Functions ............................................177
Magnifying Images........................................................................... 177
Displaying Multiple Images .............................................................. 178
Playing Back Images Continuously.................................................. 181
Rotating Images............................................................................... 183
Deleting Multiple Images ...........................................................184
Deleting Selected Images................................................................ 184
Deleting a Folder.............................................................................. 185
Deleting All Images.......................................................................... 186
Processing Images.....................................................................187
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels (Resize) ........................ 187
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping) ........................................ 188
Processing Images with Digital Filters ............................................. 189
Joining Multiple Images (Index) ....................................................... 194
Developing RAW Images ...........................................................196
Developing One RAW Image........................................................... 196
Developing Multiple RAW Images ................................................... 198
Connecting the Camera to an AV Device.................................200
Connecting the Camera to a Video Input Terminal.......................... 200
Setting the Video Output Format ..................................................... 201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Changing Additional Settings
203
How to Operate the Set-up Menu..............................................204
Set-up Menu Items........................................................................... 204
Camera Settings .........................................................................206
Setting the Sound Effects, Date and Time, and Display
Language......................................................................................... 206
Setting the Monitor and the Menu Displays ..................................... 210
Battery Settings................................................................................ 214
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera (Memory)....................... 215
Resetting the Camera Settings........................................................ 217
Checking the Camera Version Information...................................... 218
File Management Settings .........................................................219
Formatting an SD Memory Card...................................................... 219
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect)....................................... 220
Setting the Naming System of the Folder ........................................ 221
Creating New Folders ...................................................................... 222
Setting the File Name ...................................................................... 223
Setting the Photographer Information.............................................. 224
Using an Eye-Fi Card....................................................................... 226
Setting the DPOF Settings............................................................... 229
Connecting to a Computer
231
Manipulating Captured Images on a Computer.......................232
Saving Images on a Computer..................................................233
Setting the USB Connection Mode .................................................. 233
Connecting the Camera and a Computer ........................................ 234
Using the Provided Software.....................................................235
Installing the Software...................................................................... 235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Using the Flash
239
Using the Built-in Flash .............................................................240
Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode ................................ 240
Using the Slow-speed Sync Flash ................................................... 240
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash...................... 242
Using an External Flash (Optional)...........................................243
Using the P-TTL Auto Flash............................................................. 244
Using the High-speed Sync Flash.................................................... 245
Using Flash in Wireless Mode ......................................................... 246
Connecting an External Flash with an Extension Cord.................... 248
Using the Contrast Control Sync Flash............................................ 250
Appendix
251
Default Settings ..........................................................................252
Functions Available with Various Lens Combinations...........259
Setting the Focal Length.................................................................. 262
Using the Aperture Ring................................................................... 263
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor.......................................................264
(Dust Removal)................................................................................ 264
Removing Dust with a Blower.......................................................... 265
Using the GPS Unit.....................................................................267
Shooting Celestial Bodies (ASTROTRACER) ................................. 268
Error Messages...........................................................................270
Troubleshooting .........................................................................273
Main Specifications....................................................................276
Index ............................................................................................283
WARRANTY POLICY ..................................................................290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
Composition of the Operating Manual
This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.
1 Before Using Your Camera
1
2
Explains the provided accessories and the names and functions of the working
parts.
2 Getting Started
Explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be
sure to read this chapter and follow the instructions.
3
3 Basic Operations
Explains basic operations for taking and playing back pictures.
4
4 Shooting Functions
Explains shooting-related functions.
5
5 Shooting Settings
Explains procedures for changing the shooting settings, such as the file
format.
6
6 Playback Functions and Image Editing
7
Explains various operations for playing back and editing images.
7 Changing Additional Settings
8
Explains general camera settings and file management settings such as the
9
8 Connecting to a Computer
instructions and a general overview of the provided software.
10
9 Using the Flash
Explains how to use the built-in flash and external flashes.
10Appendix
Explains troubleshooting and provides various resources.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
The symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.
Indicates reference page numbers explaining a related operation.
1
Indicates useful information.
Indicates precautions to take when operating the camera.
In this manual, the arrow keys of the four-way
controller are referred to in the following way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Before Using Your
Camera
Check the package contents and the names and functions
of the working parts before use.
Checking the Contents of the Package ..............18
Names and Functions of the Working Parts ......19
How to Change Function Settings ......................37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Checking the Contents of the
Package
The following accessories are packaged with the camera.
Check that all accessories are included.
1
Hot shoe cover FK
Eyecup FR
Body mount cover
(installed on camera)
(installed on camera)
(installed on camera)
Strap
O-ST132
Rechargeable lithium-ion
battery D-LI109*
Battery charger
D-BC109*
AC plug cord
USB cable
I-USB7
Software (CD-ROM)
S-SW133
Operating Manual
(this manual)
* The power supply set provided with this camera varies depending on the country or region
where the camera was purchased. The camera may come with the AA battery holder
D-BH109 and four AA lithium batteries, instead of the rechargeable lithium-ion battery
D-LI109 and battery charger D-BC109.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19
Names and Functions of the Working
Parts
Microphone
1
Image plane indicator
AF assist light
Strap lug
Lens mount index
(red dot)
Mirror
Self-timer lamp/
Remote control receiver
AF coupler
Lens information
contacts
Hot shoe
Built-in flash
Diopter adjustment
lever
Speaker
Strap lug
Viewfinder
SD Memory Card
slot
Monitor
Card cover
Terminal cover
Cable release
terminal
Card access
lamp
Connection cable
cover
Battery cover
unlock switch
VIDEO/PC output
terminal
Terminal cover
Tripod socket
Battery cover
*
In the second illustration, the camera is shown with the Hot shoe cover FK and
the Eyecup FR removed.
If the terminal covers and the connection cable cover are not closed correctly,
the dust-proof and water-resistant qualities of the camera will not be effective.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Capture Mode
Here, you can learn which parts are used and how they function when in
capture mode.
1
The factory default setting of each part is explained here, but some parts have
multiple functions and work differently depending on the selected setting.
1
7
2
3
4
8
9
5
6
a
0
c
d
e
f
g
h
b
1
m (EV Compensation)
button
Press to set the EV
2 d (Green) button
Press to reset the values
being adjusted.
compensation value. (p.92)
3
4
Shutter release button
Press to capture images. (p.66)
Turn the rear e-dial (S)
after or while pressing the m
button to change the setting.
Main switch
Move to turn the camera on
and off. (p.57)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21
5
Front e-dial (R)
c
Rear e-dial (S)
Changes the set value.
You can change the menu
when a menu screen is
displayed. (p.40)
Sets the shutter speed,
aperture and EV
compensation values. (p.90)
You can change the settings
when the control panel is
displayed. (p.39)
1
6
7
Lens unlock button
Press to detach a lens. (p.55)
You can change the menu
when a menu screen is
displayed. (p.40)
Mode dial
Changes the capture mode.
(p.82)
d
=/L button
8
9
0
a
E (Flash pop-up) button
Press to pop up the built-in
flash. (p.71)
You can select the function of
the target or to lock the
exposure value. (p.96, p.167)
V/Y button
You can assign a function to
this button. (p.165)
e
f
Q (Playback) button
Switches to playback mode.
(p.72)
Focus mode switch
Changes the focus mode.
(p.101)
4 button
When the control panel or a
menu screen is displayed,
press this button to confirm
the selected item.
U/i (Live View) button
Displays the Live View image.
(p.26)
When both [AF Active Area]
and [Contrast AF] are set to
[Select], press this button to
enable or disable changing
the autofocusing (AF) point or
area. (p.105, p.108)
Deletes the image during
Instant Review. (p.66)
b
M button
Displays the control panel.
(p.28) Press again to change
the type of information
displayed in standby mode.
(p.29)
When the camera is in \
mode or when the focus is
locked during Live View, press
this button to magnify the
image on the monitor. (p.109)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
g
Four-way controller
h
3 button
(2345)
Displays the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu (p.77). Press this button
when a menu screen is
displayed to return to the
previous screen. (p.39)
Displays the Sensitivity/White
Balance/Flash Mode/Drive
Mode setup menu. (p.76)
1
When the control panel or a
menu screen is displayed, use
this to move the cursor or
change the item to set.
Playback Mode
Here, you can learn which parts are used and how they function when in
playback mode.
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
0
6
a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
23
1
m (EV Compensation)
7
Rear e-dial (S)
button
Use this to magnify an image
or display multiple images at
the same time (p.177, p.178).
When the file format of the last
captured image is JPEG, and
its data still remains in the
buffer memory, press this
button to save the image in
RAW format. (p.72)
8
9
Q (Playback) button
Switches to capture mode.
1
4 button
Confirms the setting you
selected in the menu or
playback screen.
2
3
4
Shutter release button
Press halfway to switch to
capture mode.
0
Four-way controller
(2345)
Use this to move the cursor or
change the item to set in the
menu or playback screen.
Press the four-way controller
(3) in the single image
Main switch
Move to turn the camera on
and off. (p.57)
Front e-dial (R)
Use this to display the next or
previous image. (p.72)
display to display the playback
mode palette. (p.174)
5
6
U/i (Delete) button
Press to delete images. (p.73)
a
3 button
Displays the [Q Playback 1]
menu (p.175).
M button
Changes the type of
information displayed in
playback mode. (p.30)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
Monitor Display
Various information appears on the monitor depending on the status of the
camera.
1
The brightness level and the color of the monitor can be adjusted. (p.211)
Capture Mode
With this camera, you can take pictures while looking through the
viewfinder or while viewing the image on the monitor.
When using the viewfinder, check the status screen displayed on the
monitor and the viewfinder indicators while shooting. When not using the
viewfinder, display the Live View image on the monitor while shooting.
The camera is in “standby mode” when the status screen or the Live View
image is displayed. Press the M button in standby mode to display the
“control panel” and change settings. (p.28)
If you press the M button while the control panel is displayed, you can
select the type of information displayed in standby mode. (p.29)
Status Screen
Custom Image
Bright
1/90
200
F4.0
M
M
128
128
OK
MENU Cancel
OK
Standby mode
(status screen)
Control panel
Shooting Info Display
selection screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
Status screen
The settings for shooting with the viewfinder are displayed.
(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may differ.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
1/2000
1600
F5.6
10
11
12
10
16
17 18 19
20
13
15
10
14
10
21
25 26 27
22
23
24
28
+1.0
G1A1
123/999
1
2
3
4
5
Capture mode (p.82)
AE Lock (p.96)
GPS positioning status
Custom Image (p.155)
HDR Capture (p.149)/
Digital Filter (p.159)
16 Sensitivity (p.87)
17 Flash Mode (p.68)
18 AF point (p.104)
19 Drive Mode (p.76)
20 White Balance (p.143)
21 Flash Exposure Compensation
(p.70)
6
7
8
9
Focus mode (p.101)
AE Metering (p.97)
Shake Reduction (p.116)
Battery level (p.49)
22 White Balance fine-tuning (p.144)
23 Eye-Fi communication status
(p.226)
10 Front/rear e-dial guide
11 Shutter speed
24 Number of shots during Interval
Shooting or Multi-exposure
12 Aperture value
25 File Format (p.141)
13 Sensitivity (p.87)
14 EV Compensation (p.92)/
27 JPEG Quality (p.142)
Exposure Bracketing (p.93)
28 Number of recordable still
pictures/| button guide
15 EV bar scale
* Indicator 3 appears only when the optional GPS unit is attached to the camera
and is operating. (p.267)
* Indicator 23 appears only when the Eye-Fi card is in use. M indicates that Eye-
Fi communication is in standby mode, L indicates that Eye-Fi is not connected,
and the icon is animated during Eye-Fi communication.
The status screen will disappear if no operations are made within 30 seconds,
and will also disappear after 2 seconds, immediately after shooting. Press the
M button to display it again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
Live View
Live View is displayed when the U/i button is pressed. You can capture images
while checking the composition on the monitor.
(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may differ.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
001/999
15
11
12
13
16
17
18
EV
+1.7
14
0
EV
1/2000 F2.8
1600
9999
1/2000 F2.8
1600
[
]
[
]
9999
19 20 21 22 23
24
25
1
2
Capture mode (p.82)
Flash Mode (p.68)/
13 Temperature warning
14 Histogram (p.33)
Recording Sound Level (p.130)
15 Number of shots during Interval
Shooting or Multi-exposure
3
4
5
6
Drive Mode (p.76)
White Balance (p.143)
Custom Image (p.155)
HDR Capture (p.149)/
Digital Filter (p.159)
16 Interval Shooting (p.124)/
Multi-exposure (p.127)
17 AF frame
18 | button guide
19 AE Lock (p.96)
20 Shutter speed
21 Aperture value
22 EV bar scale
23 Sensitivity (p.87)
7
8
9
Focus mode (p.101)
AE Metering (p.97)
Shake Reduction (p.116)/
Movie SR (p.130)
10 Battery level (p.49)
11 GPS positioning status
24 Number of recordable still
pictures/movie recordable time
12 Eye-Fi communication status
(p.226)
25 Face detection frame
* Indicator 11 appears only when the optional GPS unit is attached to the camera
and is operating. (p.267)
* Indicator 12 appears only when the Eye-Fi card is in use. M indicates that Eye-
Fi communication is in standby mode, L indicates that Eye-Fi is not connected,
and the icon is animated during Eye-Fi communication.
* Indicator 17 is displayed in white. It turns green when the subject is in focus and
turns red when the subject is not in focus. It is not displayed when the focus
mode switch is set to \. (p.67)
* For indicator 25, multiple face detection frames are displayed when [Contrast
AF] is set to [Face Detection]. A main face detection frame is displayed in yellow
and other frames in white. (p.106)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
27
• The Live View image may differ from the actual image captured if the
brightness of the subject is low or high.
• If any changes occur in the shooting light source during Live View, the image
on the monitor may flicker. You can cut down on flicker by setting the power
frequency in [Flicker Reduction] of the [R Set-up 2] menu to that used in your
region.
• If the camera position is changed rapidly during Live View, the image may not
be displayed with the appropriate brightness. Wait for the display to become
stable before shooting.
1
• Noise may appear on the Live View image when used in dark locations.
• The higher the sensitivity, the more noise and color unevenness may occur in
the monitor image and/or captured image.
• If you continue shooting for a prolonged period, the internal temperature of
the camera may increase, resulting in lower quality images. It is
recommended that you turn off the camera when not shooting. To prevent the
image quality from degrading, allow enough time for the camera to cool down
while shooting with long exposures or recording movies.
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high, l (temperature
warning) is displayed and Live View may not be available. If this happens,
stop shooting or use the viewfinder.
You can change the Live View display settings in [Live View] of the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu. (p.107)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
Control panel
Press the M button in standby mode to display the control panel and change
settings. (p.38)
Still picture capture mode
1
Custom Image
Bright
1
2
3
8
4
9
5
6
7
10
15
11
16
12
17
13
14
19
18
20 21
128
C mode
Exposure Setting
Program AE
1
2
22
10
24
3
4
12
23
17
15
11
16
14
18
19
20
21
1:15'30"
1
2
3
Function name
Setting
Custom Image (p.155)/
14 JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.141)/
Movie Recorded Pixels (p.130)
15 JPEG Quality (p.142)/
H mode (p.84)
Movie Quality Level (p.130)
4
5
6
7
8
9
Digital Filter (p.159)
HDR Capture (p.149)
AF Active Area (p.104)
AF.A (p.103)
Distortion Correction (p.151)
Lateral Chromatic Aberration
Adjustment (p.151)
16 Shake Reduction (p.116)/
Movie SR (p.130)
17 Contrast AF (p.106)
18 Destination setting (p.207)
19 Current date and time (p.60)
20 SD Memory Card status
21 Number of recordable still
pictures/movie recordable time
10 Highlight Correction (p.148)
11 Shadow Correction (p.148)
12 AE Metering (p.97)
22 Exposure Setting (p.129)
23 Framerate (p.130)
13 File Format (p.141)
24 Recording Sound Level (p.130)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
29
• If no operations are made within 1 minute in the control panel, the camera
returns to standby mode.
• You can change the display color of the status screen and control panel. Set
in [LCD Display] of the [R Set-up 1] menu. (p.210)
1
Shooting Info Display
If you press the M button while the control panel is displayed, you can select
the type of information displayed in standby mode for when shooting with the
viewfinder. Use the four-way controller (2345) to select a display type and
press the 4 button.
Screen
Displayed Information
Display
Status
Displays the settings for shooting with the viewfinder. (p.25)
Screen
Display Off Nothing is displayed on the monitor.
Universal Time (UTC) are displayed. Press the shutter release
button halfway or turn the camera off and on again to return to the
status screen.
Electronic
Compass
Available only when the optional GPS unit is attached to the camera
and is operating. (p.267)
The Shooting Info Display selection screen is not displayed when the mode dial
is set to C.
• If [Display Off] is selected, the display setting returns to the status screen
when the camera is turned off and on again. If you select the check box for
[Shooting Info Display] in [Memory] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, the
selected screen display appears the next time the camera is turned on.
(p.216)
• The Live View image and the indicators which provide shooting information
are displayed during Live View shooting. If you do not want to display the
indicators, you can change the setting in [Live View] of the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu. (p.107)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
Playback Mode
The captured image and shooting information are displayed in the single
image display of playback mode.
1Playing Back Images (p.72)
1
Press the M button to call up the playback information display
selection screen. Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the type
of screen display that appears in the single image display and press the
4 button.
Standard Innformaation Diisplay
100-0001
M
1/2000 F2.8
200
Cancel
MENU
OK OK
Single image display
(Standard Information Display)
Playback Info Display
selection screen
Screen Display
Displayed Information
Standard Information
Display
The captured image, file format and operation guide
indicators are displayed.
Detailed Information
Display
Detailed information on how and when the image was
taken is displayed in two pages. (p.31)
The captured image and brightness histogram are
displayed. (p.33)
Histogram Display
The captured image and RGB histogram are
RGB Histogram Display displayed. (p.33)
Not available during movie playback.
No Information Display
Only the captured image is displayed.
The screen display selected here is displayed the next time the camera is
switched to playback mode.
• If you clear the check box for [Playback Info Display] in [Memory] of the [A
Rec. Mode 4] menu, the Standard Information Display always appears first
when the camera is turned on. (p.215)
• If [Bright/Dark Area] (p.176) of the [Q Playback 1] menu is enabled by
selecting the check box, bright (overexposed) portions blink red, while dark
(underexposed) portions blink yellow. This information is not displayed in
Detailed Information Display or RGB Histogram Display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
31
Detailed Information Display
Use the four-way controller (23) to switch between pages.
(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may differ.)
Page 1
1
Still picture
1
3
4
5
6
7
100-0001
2
8
9
29
30
13
1/2000
F2.8
50mm
+1.5
0
10
11
15
12
16
0
0
0
0
14
18
17
21
+1.0
G1A1
19 20
1600
22 23 24
31
25 26 27 28
32
05/05/2013 10:30 AM
Movie
3
6
7
100-0001
10'10"
2
33
29
30
1/125
F8.0
125
50mm
0.0
0
0
0
0
0
10
11
15
8
34
20
9
12
14
18
4
21
G1A1
23 35 24
25 26
32
05/05/2013 10:30 AM
Page 2
1
36
6
7
100-0001
2
38
39
39
37
40
41
43
42
37
N
36°45.410'
0m
W140°02.000'
123°
44
05/05/2013
10:00:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rotation information (p.183)
Captured image
Capture mode (p.82)
Digital Filter (p.159)
DPOF setting (p.229)
Protect setting (p.220)
7
8
9
Folder number-File number
Drive Mode (p.76)
AE Metering (p.97)
10 Shutter speed
11 Lens focal length
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
12 Shake Reduction (p.116)/
27 Distortion Correction (p.151)
Movie SR (p.130)
28 Lateral Chromatic Aberration
Adjustment (p.151)
13 Focus mode (p.101)/AF point
(p.104)/Contrast AF (p.106)
29 Custom Image (p.155)
14 Aperture value
30 Custom Image parameters
(p.156)
15 EV Compensation (p.92)
16 Flash Mode (p.68)
17 Flash Exposure Compensation
1
31 Color Space (p.142)
32 Shooting date and time
33 Recording time
(p.70)
18 Sensitivity (p.87)
19 HDR Capture (p.149)/
35 Framerate (p.130)
Multi-exposure (p.127)
36 Transferred via Eye-Fi (p.226)
37 Lens direction
20 White Balance (p.143)
22 File Format (p.141)
39 Information tampering warning
23 JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.141)/
40 Copyright Holder (p.225)
41 Latitude
Movie Recorded Pixels (p.130)
24 JPEG Quality (p.142)/
42 Altitude
Movie Quality Level (p.130)
43 Longitude
25 Highlight Correction (p.148)
44 Universal Coordinated Time
26 Shadow Correction (p.148)
* Indicator 36 appears only for images that have been transferred using the Eye-
Fi card.
stored.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
33
Histogram Display/RGB Histogram Display
Use the four-way controller (23) to switch between the Histogram Display and
RGB Histogram Display.
1
2
3
4
2
3
100-0001
100-0001
1
4
9
10
11
1
1/2000 F2.8
200
1/2000 F2.8
200
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
Histogram Display
RGB Histogram Display
1
Histogram (Brightness)
Protect setting
Folder number-File number
Save RAW Data
File Format
7
8
9
Aperture value
Sensitivity
Histogram (R)
2
3
4
5
6
10 Histogram (G)
11 Histogram (B)
Shutter speed
* Indicator 4 appears only when the file format of the last captured image is JPEG,
and the image can also be saved in RAW format. (p.72)
Using the Histogram
A histogram shows the brightness
distribution of an image. The
horizontal axis represents brightness
(dark at the left and bright at the right)
and the vertical axis represents the
number of pixels.
The shape and the distribution of the
histogram before and after shooting
tell you whether the exposure level
(Dark) Brightness (Bright)
Dark portions Bright portions
and contrast are correct or not, and let you decide if you need to adjust the
exposure and take a picture again.
1Adjusting the Exposure (p.92)
1Brightness Adjustment (p.148)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34
When the image is underexposed, the part to the left is cut off
(underexposed portions with no detail) and when the image is
overexposed, the part to the right is cut off (overexposed portions with no
detail).
You can set whether to display the bright/dark area warning during capture
or playback mode.
1
1Setting the Playback Display Method (p.176)
1Setting the Display for Instant Review (p.212)
Distribution of color intensity is displayed for each color in RGB Histogram
Display. If a color is partially cut off on one side, it indicates that the color
is under- or overexposed, that the light is very weak or strong in that color,
or that the white balance is incorrect.
1Setting the White Balance (p.143)
Guide Indicators
The following indicators appear on the monitor to indicate the keys,
buttons and e-dials that can be operated at that time.
Example:
2
3
4
5
Four-way controller (2)
Four-way controller (3)
Four-way controller (4)
Four-way controller (5)
3 button
d button
M button
m button
U/i button
=/L button
|/Y button
Shutter release button
4 button
R
S
Front e-dial
Rear e-dial
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
35
Viewfinder
When shooting with the viewfinder, the following information appears in
the viewfinder.
1
2
1
1
3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
12
13 14 15 16 17 18
1
2
3
AF frame
Spot metering frame (p.97)
Flash indicator (p.71)
Lit:
when the flash is available.
Blinks: when the flash is necessary or is being charged.
4
5
6
7
Focus mode (p.101)
Appears when set to \.
Shutter speed
Underlined when it can be adjusted.
Aperture value
Underlined when it can be adjusted.
Focus indicator (p.65)
Lit:
when the subject is in focus.
Blinks: when the subject is not in focus.
8
9
EV bar scale
Displays the EV compensation values or difference between the
appropriate and current exposure values in a mode. (p.90, p.92)
ISO/ISO AUTO (p.87)
Appears when the sensitivity is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
10 Sensitivity/Remaining image storage capacity
Underlined when it can be adjusted.
Displays the number of recordable still pictures (up to “9999”) immediately
after shooting.
Displays the compensation value while adjusting the EV compensation.
11 AE Lock (p.96)
Appears while the AE Lock function is activated.
12 Changing AF point (p.105)
1
Appears when the AF point can be changed.
13 Multi-exposure (p.127)
Appears when Multi-exposure is set.
14 AE Metering (p.97)
Appears when Center-weighted metering or Spot metering is selected.
15 Shake Reduction (p.116)
Appears when the Shake Reduction function is activated.
16 Flash Exposure Compensation (p.70)
Appears when the flash exposure compensation value is being adjusted.
17 EV Compensation (p.92)/Exposure Bracketing (p.93)
Appears when adjusting the EV compensation or when Exposure
Bracketing is set.
18 File Format (p.141)
Appears when the file format is RAW or RAW+.
The information is displayed in the viewfinder when the shutter release button
is pressed halfway, or during the meter operating time (default setting: 10 sec.).
(p.97)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
37
How to Change Function Settings
Function settings can be changed using the direct keys, control panel or
menus.
This section explains the basic ways to change function settings.
1
Using the Direct Keys
In standby mode, you can set Sensitivity, White Balance, Flash Mode and
Below, how to set [Flash Mode] is explained as an example.
1
Press the four-way controller (4)
in standby mode.
The Flash Mode setting screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a flash mode.
Auto Flashh Discharge
0.0
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38
Using the Control Panel
In standby mode, you can switch to the control panel and change settings.
Below, how to set [JPEG Quality] is explained as an example.
1
1
Press the M button in
standby mode.
The control panel appears.
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select the item you
want to change the setting for.
Custom Image
Bright
You cannot select items that cannot be
changed as a result of current camera
settings.
128
Press the 4 button.
JPEG Quality
The setup screen of the selected item
appears.
128
128
Use the four-way controller (45)
or rear e-dial (S) to select a
setting value.
JPEG Quality
Items not available with the current
camera settings cannot be selected.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
39
5
6
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
Next, set other items.
1
Press the 3 button or the shutter release button
halfway.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
You can also change the setting by turning the rear e-dial (S) after selecting
the item you want to change in Step 2 ([Recording Sound Level] for C mode
can only be set using this operation). Detailed settings such as for Custom
Image and Digital Filter can be changed after pressing the 4 button.
Using the Menus
This section explains how to use the following menus: [A Rec. Mode],
[C Movie], [Q Playback], [R Set-up] and [A Custom Setting].
Below, how to set [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu
is explained as an example.
1
Press the 3 button in
standby mode.
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu appears on
the monitor.
The menus listed below are displayed in
the following situations.
When the mode [C Movie 1] menu
dial is set to C
In playback
mode
[Q Playback 1] menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
twice.
1 2 3 4
Custom Image
Digitall Filter
Each time the four-way controller (5) is
pressed, the menu will change in the
following sequence: [A Rec. Mode 2],
[A Rec. Mode 3], [A Rec. Mode 4],
[C Movie 1] ... [A Rec. Mode 1].
HDR Capture
Image Capture Settings
AE Meteering
1
Exit
MENU
You can also change the menu by turning
the rear e-dial (S).
When the front e-dial (R) is turned to the right, the menu will change
in the following sequence: [A Rec. Mode 1], [C Movie 1],
[Q Playback 1], [R Set-up 1], [A Custom Setting 1].
3
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select an item.
1 2 3 4
High-ISO NR
Slow Shuttter Speed NR
Compoositiioon Adjust.
Shake Reduction
Input Focaal Length
Exit
MENU
Press the four-way controller
(5).
1 2 3 4
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutteer Speeed NR
Compoositiioon Adjust.
Shake Reduction
Input Focaal Length
Available settings are displayed in the
pop-up menu or submenu.
Exit
MENU
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a setting.
1 2 3 4
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Compoositiioon Adjust.
Shake Reduction
Input Focaal Length
Press the 3 button to cancel the
pop-up menu, or return to the previous
screen.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
41
6
7
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Press the 3 button if a submenu is
displayed.
1
Next, set other items.
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before
selecting the menu item appears again.
Your settings may not be saved if the camera is turned off improperly (such as
by removing the battery while the camera is on).
• You can select either to display the menu tab selected the last time first, or
to always display the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu first. (p.213)
• Refer to the following pages for details on each menu.
•
•
•
•
•
[A Rec. Mode] menu 1p.77
[C Movie] menu 1p.79
[Q Playback] menu 1p.175
[R Set-up] menu 1p.204
[A Custom Setting] menu 1p.80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Getting Started
This chapter explains your first steps from purchasing the
camera to taking pictures. Be sure to read this and follow
the instructions.
Attaching the Strap ..............................................44
Inserting the Battery ............................................45
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card ..........52
Attaching a Lens ..................................................54
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter .......................56
Turning the Camera On and Off ..........................57
Initial Settings .......................................................58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
45
Inserting the Battery
The following power supplies can be used with the camera.
*
• Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI109
*
• AA Battery Holder D-BH109 with four AA batteries
• AC Adapter Kit K-AC128 (optional)
* Either one of these is provided with the camera. The provided power supply varies
depending on the country or region where the camera was purchased. The item not
provided with the camera is optionally available.
2
Using the Lithium-ion Battery
Use the battery charger D-BC109 and the rechargeable lithium-ion battery
D-LI109 to power the camera.
Charging the Battery
When using the battery for the first time or when the battery capacity
becomes low, recharge the battery.
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible
cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6ft (1.8m)”
1
Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.
2
Battery charger
Indicator lamp
AC plug cord
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46
3
4
Face the 2 mark on the battery
up, and insert the battery into the
battery charger.
First, insert the battery at an angle, as
shown in the illustration, and then push
down on the battery until it clicks.
The indicator lamp lights up when
charging and turns off when the battery is
fully charged.
2
When the battery is fully charged, remove the battery from
the battery charger.
• Do not use the Battery Charger D-BC109 to charge batteries other than D-
LI109. Charging other batteries may cause damage or heating.
• Replace the battery with a new one in the following cases:
• If the indicator lamp blinks or does not light after the battery is inserted
correctly
• If the battery starts to run down more quickly even after being charged (the
battery may have reached the end of its service life)
The maximum charging time is approximately 240 minutes (depends on
temperature and remaining battery power). Charge in a location where the
temperature is between 0°C and 40°C.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
47
Inserting/Removing the Battery
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the battery while the power is on.
• Insert the battery correctly. If the battery is inserted incorrectly, it may not be
removed. Wipe the electrodes of the battery with a soft dry cloth before
inserting.
• Be careful as the camera or battery may become hot when the camera is
used continuously for a long period of time.
2
• Remove the battery when you will not use the camera for a long while. The
battery may leak and damage the camera if left installed during prolonged
periods of non-use. If the removed battery will not be used for six months or
longer, charge the battery for about 30 minutes before storing it. Be sure to
recharge the battery every six to twelve months.
• Store the battery in a location where the temperature will remain below room
temperature. Avoid locations with high temperatures.
• The date and time may be reset if you leave the battery out of the camera for
a long period of time. If this occurs, follow the procedure described in “Setting
the Date and Time” (p.60) to set the current date and time.
1
Slide the battery cover unlock
switch in the direction of the
arrow (1), and open the battery
cover (2).
2
1
2
With the 2 mark facing towards
outside of the camera, push the
battery in until it locks into place.
To remove the battery, push the battery
lock switch in the direction of the arrow
(3).
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
3
Close the battery cover.
The battery cover is locked.
2
Using the AA Batteries
When using AA batteries, be sure to use the AA battery holder D-BH109.
Use four AA lithium batteries, AA Ni-MH rechargeable batteries, or AA
alkaline batteries.
Available Batteries
Characteristics
AA lithium batteries Recommended when using the camera in cold climates.
AA Ni-MH
rechargeable
batteries
These are rechargeable and reusable.
A battery charger that is compatible with the batteries is
required.
These are easily obtainable when the batteries you are
using run out but they may not support all the camera
functions under certain conditions. Use them in
AA alkaline batteries
emergencies or when checking the camera functionality.
• For precautions when using the batteries, refer to “About the Usage of AA
Batteries” (p.3).
• If AA Ni-MH rechargeable batteries with a capacity of approximately
1000 mAh are used, the batteries may not last for very long. Use Ni-MH
rechargeable batteries with a large capacity.
1
Insert the AA batteries according
to the +/- indicators on the
battery holder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
49
2
3
Open the battery cover.
Refer to Step 1 on p.47.
Insert the battery holder into the battery chamber until it
locks into place, and close the battery cover.
•
To use the AA batteries, set the AA battery type in [AA Battery Type] of the [
Set-up 3] menu before use. (p.214)
R
2
• Check the orientation of the batteries if the camera does not operate
properly.
Battery Level Indicator
You can confirm remaining battery level by checking the w displayed in
the status screen or Live View screen.
Display
w (green)
Battery Level
Battery is full.
x (green)
f (orange)
y (yellow)
F (red)
Battery is close to full. (D-LI109 only)
Battery is running low. (D-LI109 only)
Battery is almost empty.
[Battery depleted]
The camera turns off after displaying the message.
• f, y or F (red) may appear even when the battery level is
sufficient if the camera is used at low temperatures or when performing
continuous shooting for a long period of time.
• Battery performance temporarily decreases as the temperature decreases.
When using the camera in cold climates, have extra batteries at hand and
keep them warm in your pocket. The battery performance will return to
normal at room temperature.
• Have extra batteries ready when traveling abroad, or taking a lot of pictures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
Using the AC Adapter
We recommend the use of the optional AC adapter kit K-AC128 when
using the monitor for a long time or when connecting the camera to a
computer or AV device.
The AC Adapter Kit K-AC128 includes AC Adapter D-AC120, DC Coupler
D-DC128, and AC plug cord.
2
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off.
Open the battery cover.
2
Refer to Step 1 on p.47.
Remove the battery if it is inserted in the camera.
3
4
Pull out the connection cable
cover (1) on the right of the
battery cover, and insert the DC
coupler into the battery chamber
until it locks into place.
1
Close the battery cover.
The connection cable is pulled out from
the connection cable cover section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
51
5
Connect the DC coupler and the AC adapter.
7
2
5
6
6
7
Connect the AC adapter to the AC plug cord.
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.
• Make sure the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the
AC adapter.
• Make sure connections are secure between the terminals. SD Memory Card
or data may be corrupted if the connection to the power supply is lost while
the card is being accessed.
• The connection cable will protrude from the connection cable cover on the
camera while the AC adapter is in use.
• After removing the DC coupler, return the connection cable cover to its
original position.
• When the AC adapter is connected to the camera, W is displayed for the
battery level indicator.
• Be sure to read the manual of the AC adapter kit before using the AC adapter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory
Card
This camera uses a commercially available SD Memory Card, SDHC
Memory Card, or SDXC Memory Card.
Make sure the camera is turned off before inserting or removing the SD
Memory Card.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while the card access lamp is lit.
• Do not open the card cover while the camera is in use.
2
• Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or
has been used on other devices. Refer to “Formatting an SD Memory Card”
(p.219) for details on formatting.
cannot keep up with the recording speed, writing may stop during recording.
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off.
2
Slide the card cover in the
direction of the arrow, and then
lift it to open (12).
1
2
3
Insert the card all the way with
the SD Memory Card label facing
toward the monitor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
53
Push the SD Memory Card in once to
remove.
2
4
Close the card cover (3), and
then slide it in the direction of the
arrow (4).
4
3
Be sure to fully close the card cover. The camera will not turn on if the card
cover is open.
For details on the approximate number of still pictures and amount of time of
movies that can be recorded on an SD Memory Card, refer to “Approximate
Image Storage Capacity by Size” (p.282).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
Attaching a Lens
Attach a proper lens to the camera body.
When you use one of the following lenses with this camera, all the
camera’s capture modes are available.
(a) DA, DA L, D FA, FA J lenses
(b) Lenses with an s (Auto) position; when used in the s position
2
• When attaching or removing a lens, choose an environment that is relatively
free of dirt and dust.
• Keep the body mount cover on the camera when a lens is not attached.
• Be sure to attach the lens mount cover and lens cap to the lens after
removing the lens from the camera.
• Do not insert any fingers into the camera mount or touch the mirror.
• The camera body and lens mount incorporate lens information contacts. Dirt,
dust, or corrosion on the contacts may damage the electrical system. Please
contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning.
• Some functions will be restricted when one of lenses described in (b) is used
with the aperture ring set to the position other than s, or when a lens other
than listed above and/or other accessories are used. Refer to “Functions
Available with Various Lens Combinations” (p.259) for details.
• If a lens for which the focal length information cannot be automatically
obtained is used, the [Input Focal Length] screen appears when the camera
is turned on. Refer to “Setting the Focal Length” (p.262) for details.
• We assume no responsibility nor liability for accidents, damages and
malfunctions resulting from the use of lenses made by other manufacturers.
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off.
Remove the body mount cover
2
(
1) and lens mount cover (2).
Be sure to put the lens down with the lens
mount side facing upward to protect the
lens mount from damage when there is
no lens mount cover on the lens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
55
3
4
Align the lens mount index (red
dots: 3) on the camera and the
lens, and secure by turning the
lens clockwise until it clicks.
After attaching, turn the lens
counterclockwise to make sure that the
lens is locked in place.
3
2
Remove the front lens cap by
pushing the indicated portions
inward.
To remove the lens
Attach the lens cap first, and then turn the
lens counterclockwise while holding
down the lens unlock button (4).
4
The body mount cover (1) is for preventing scratches and blocking dust when
shipped. Body Mount Cap K that has a lock on the body is sold separately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter
You can adjust the viewfinder diopter to suit your eyesight.
The Eyecup FR is attached to the viewfinder portion when the camera
leaves the factory. The diopter can be adjusted with the eyecup attached.
However, adjustment is easier with the eyecup removed.
2
1
Remove the eyecup by pulling it
out in the direction of the arrow.
2
Look through the viewfinder, and
slide the diopter adjustment lever
left or right.
Adjust the lever until the AF frame in the
viewfinder is focused.
Point the camera at a white wall or other
bright and consistent surface.
AF frame
3
Align the eyecup with the groove on the viewfinder
eyepiece and push it into the position.
You can also use the optional Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53 for more precise
focusing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
57
Turning the Camera On and Off
1
Turn the main switch to [ON].
The camera turns on.
Set the main switch to the position [OFF]
to turn off the camera.
2
• Always turn the camera off when not in use.
• The power will automatically turn off when you do not perform any operations
within a set period of time (Auto Power Off). To reactivate the camera, turn it
on again or perform any of the following operations.
• Press the shutter release button halfway.
• Press the 3 button or M button.
• [Auto Power Off] is set to [1min.] by default. You can change the setting in
[Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3] menu. (p.214)
• To turn the camera on in playback mode, turn the main switch to [ON] while
holding down the Q button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
Initial Settings
The first time the camera is turned on, the [Language/u] screen appears
on the monitor. Follow the procedure below to set the language displayed
on the monitor and the current date and time.
If the [Date Adjustment] screen appears,
Date Adjuustment
proceed to “Setting the Date and Time”
(p.60).
2
Date Format
Date
mm/dd/yy
24h
01/01//2013
00:00
Time
Settings complete
Cancel
MENU
Setting the Display Language
You can set the language in which the menus, error messages, etc. are
displayed.
1
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the desired
language, and press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in the
Initial SSetting
selected language.
Proceed to Step 6 if W (Hometown) does
English
New York
not have to be changed.
Text Size
Settings coomplete
Cancel
Standard
MENU
2
Press the four-way controller (3) to move the frame to W,
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [W Hometown] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
59
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a city.
Hometown
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to change the
region.
Refer to “List of World Time Cities”
(p.209) for cities that can be selected as a
hometown.
New York
DST
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
2
4
5
6
7
Press the four-way controller (3) to select [DST], and use
the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or P (Off).
Press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen reappears.
Press the four-way controller (3) to select [Text Size], and
press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)
Initial SSetting
to select [Standard] or [Large],
English
and press the 4 button.
New York
Selecting [Large] increases the text size
of the selected menu items.
Text Size
Standard
Large
Settingss complete
Cancel
MENU
8
Press the four-way controller (3)
to select [Settings complete], and
press the 4 button.
Initial SSetting
English
New York
Text Size
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.
Standard
Settings coomplete
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
• If the hometown and the date and time are not set, the [Initial Setting] screen
or [Date Adjustment] screen will be displayed again the next time the camera
is turned on.
•
You can change the text size from the [
R
Set-up 1] menu later. In this manual,
the menu screens hereafter are described with [Text Size] set to [Standard].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time and the display style.
1
Press the four-way controller
(5), and use the four-way
controller (23) to select the date
format.
Date Adjuustment
Date Format
Date
mm/dd/yy
24h
2
01/01//2013
00:00
Time
Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or
[yy/mm/dd].
Settings complete
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
2
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5), and use the four-way
controller (23) to select [24h] or [12h].
Press the 4 button.
The frame returns to [Date Format].
Press the four-way controller (3), and press the four-way
controller (5).
The frame moves to the month if the date format is set to [mm/dd/yy].
5
Use the four-way controller (23)
to set the month.
Date Adjuustment
Date Format
Date
mm/dd/yy
24h
Set the day and year in the same manner.
Next, set the time.
01/01/2013
00:00
Time
If you select [12h] in Step 2, the camera
switches between am and pm depending
on the time.
Settings complete
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
61
6
Press the four-way controller (3)
to select [Settings complete], and
press the 4 button.
Date Adjuustment
Date Format
Date
mm/dd/yy
24h
05/05//2013
10:00
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Time
If you set the date and time from the
menu, the [R Set-up 1] menu reappears.
In this case, press the 3 button.
Settings complete
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
2
• When you press the 4 button in Step 6, the seconds value is set to 0. To
set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal (on the TV,
radio, etc.) reaches 0 seconds.
• Pressing the 3 button while setting the date and time cancels the
settings made up to that point and switches the camera to capture mode.
• You can change the language and date and time settings from the [R Set-up
1] menu later.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Basic Operations
This chapter explains basic operations for shooting by
setting the mode dial to n (Auto Picture) to have the
camera select the optimum settings based on the subject.
For information about advanced functions and settings for
taking pictures, refer to chapter 4 and onward.
Basic Shooting Operation ...................................64
Using the Built-in Flash .......................................68
Reviewing Images ................................................72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64
Basic Shooting Operation
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal
Settings
This camera features various capture modes, focus modes, and drive
modes. This section explains how to take pictures by simply pressing the
shutter release button.
You can take pictures while looking through the viewfinder or while viewing
the image on the monitor.
3
Taking Pictures Using the Viewfinder
1
Set the mode dial to n.
The capture mode is set to n mode.
1Selecting the Appropriate Capture
Mode (p.82)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
65
2
Set the focus mode switch to
l.
In n mode, the focus mode changes to
f (Autofocus/Auto) mode.
1Setting the Focus Mode (p.101)
3
3
4
Look through the viewfinder to
view the subject.
When using a zoom lens, turn the zoom
ring to the right or left to change the angle
of view.
Position the subject inside the AF frame, and press the
shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus (focus lock).
When set to n mode, the optimal
capture mode is automatically selected
from U (Standard), c (Portrait), s
(Landscape), b (Macro), \ (Moving
Object), . (Night Scene Portrait), K
(Sunset), d (Blue Sky) or x (Forest).
(p.83)
Flash
status
Focus indicator
The AF assist light turns on in a dark or backlit location. If the flash is
necessary, the flash status E blinks in the viewfinder. Press the E button
to pop up the flash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
5
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
This action is referred to as “releasing the shutter” or “release”.
Review the captured image on the monitor.
The image appears for 1 second on the monitor shortly after it is captured
(Instant Review).
The following operations can be performed during Instant Review.
Available operations
3
U/i button
Rear e-dial (S)
m button
Deletes the image. (p.73)
Magnifies the image. (p.177)
is available). (p.72)
1Setting the Display for Instant Review (p.212)
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.206)
• You can set the camera so that it automatically focuses when the =/L
button is pressed. (p.167)
• You can preview the image on the monitor and check the depth of field before
shooting. (p.114)
Power zoom functions (Image Size Tracking, Zoom Clip and Auto Zoom Effect)
are not available with this camera. Use manual zoom.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
67
Taking Pictures Using Live View
1
Press the U/i button in Step 3
on p.65.
The Live View image is displayed on the
monitor.
3
2
Position the subject inside the AF
frame on the monitor, and press
the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
The AF frame turns green when focused.
Subsequent steps are the same as
shooting with the viewfinder.
1/2000 F2.8
1600
[
]
37
Press the U/i button to end the Live
View shooting.
AF frame
• You can magnify the central area in focus by pressing the 4 button while
the focus is locked (except when [Contrast AF] is set to [Tracking]). (p.109)
• In this manual, the explanations and examples are mainly for shooting with
the viewfinder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68
Using the Built-in Flash
Use a flash to take pictures in low light or backlit conditions.
The built-in flash is optimum for a subject at a distance from approx. 0.7 m
to 5 m. Vignetting (darkening of the corners of the image due to a lack of
light) may occur when used at a distance closer than 0.7 m (this distance
varies slightly depending on the lens being used and the sensitivity setting
(p.242)).
• When using the built-in flash, remove the lens hood before shooting.
Vignetting may occur depending on the lens being used and the shooting
conditions. Refer to “Lens and Built-in Flash” (p.261) for details.
• The built-in flash always fully discharges when using a lens without an s
(Auto) position.
3
For details on the built-in flash and instructions on how to take pictures with an
external flash, refer to “Using the Flash” (p.239).
Setting the Flash Mode
Flash Mode
Function
Auto Flash
Discharge
Automatically measures the ambient light and
determines whether to use the flash.
C
Auto Flash+
Red-eye Reduction the automatic flash.
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before
i
E
Flash On
Discharges the flash for each picture.
Flash On+
Red-eye Reduction the main flash.
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before
F
Sets to a slow shutter speed depending on the
brightness. When using this to shoot a portrait with
the sunset in the background, both the person and
Slow-speed Sync
G
H
Slow-speed Sync+ Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before
Red-eye
the main flash is discharged with Slow-speed Sync.
Discharges the flash immediately before closing the
shutter. Captures moving objects as if they are
leaving a light trail behind them.
Trailing Curtain
Sync
I
k
You can synchronize an optional external flash
without using a sync cord. (p.246)
Wireless Mode
r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
69
The flash modes that can be selected differ depending on the capture
mode.
Capture Mode
n/H
Selectable Flash Mode
C/i/E/F/r
E/F/G/H/I/r
E/F/k/r
e/K/c
b/L/a/p
The flash does not discharge in the following capture modes:
• C mode
• K (Sunset) or d (Blue Sky) of n mode
• K (Sunset), d (Blue Sky), A (Night Scene), Z (Night Scene HDR), y
(Backlight Silhouette), U (Candlelight), n (Stage Lighting) or E (Museum)
of H mode
3
1
Press the four-way controller (4) in standby mode.
The Flash Mode setting screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a flash mode, and press
Auto Flashh Discharge
the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
0.0
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Slow-speed Sync and Trailing Curtain Sync slow down the shutter speed. To
avoid camera shake, either turn on the Shake Reduction function, or use a
tripod.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70
Compensating Flash Output
You can adjust the flash output in a range of -2.0 to +1.0. The following
flash compensation values can be set according to the step interval set in
[1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
EV Steps
1/3 EV
Selectable Flash Compensation Value
-2.0, -1.7, -1.3, -1.0, -0.7, -0.3, 0.0, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0
-2.0, -1.5, -1.0, -0.5, 0.0, +0.5, +1.0
1/2 EV
3
1
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S).
Auto Flashh Discharge
The flash compensation value is set.
Press the d button to reset the value to
0.0.
+0.7
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
• When the flash output exceeds its maximum amount, the compensation will
not be effective even if the compensation value is set to the plus (+) side.
• Compensating to the minus (-) side may have no effect if the subject is too
close, the aperture is set to a large opening, or the set sensitivity is high.
• The flash output compensation is also effective for external flash units which
support the P-TTL auto flash mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
71
Using the Built-in Flash
1
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up and begins
charging. While the flash is charging, E
blinks in the viewfinder or Live View
screen.
When the flash is fully charged, E stops
blinking and stays lit continuously.
3
When you do not want the flash to
discharge, keep the built-in flash retracted.
2
3
Take a picture.
The flash discharges.
When the flash mode is set to C or i, the flash is not discharged if the
lighting conditions do not require flash for correction even when the flash
is popped up.
Push down on the top of the flash
to retract the built-in flash.
By default, you cannot take pictures while the built-in flash is being charged. If
you want to take pictures while charging the built-in flash, set [15. Release
While Charging] to [On] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
Reviewing Images
Playing Back Images
You can play back captured images with the camera.
1
Press the Q button.
The camera switches to the single image
display of playback mode and the most
recently captured image (for movies, only
the first frame) is displayed on the
monitor.
3
2
Review the captured image on the monitor.
Available operations
Four-way controller (4)/
Displays the previous image.
front e-dial (R) to the left
Four-way controller (5)/
Displays the next image.
front e-dial (R) to the right
m button
Saves the RAW image (only when the
data is available).
• When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its RAW data
still remains in the buffer memory, you can save the RAW image during
Instant Review or playback (if [Save RAW Data] is enabled in [Instant
Review] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu (p.212)).
If the image was captured using any of the following settings, the
corresponding image listed below is saved.
• Exposure Bracketing
• Multi-exposure
• Interval Shooting
• HDR Capture
RAW image of the third image
RAW image with Multi-exposure
RAW image for the last captured image
RAW image with standard exposure
RAW image without a filter effect
• Digital Filter
Images captured with Z (Night Scene HDR) of H mode or Continuous
Shooting cannot be saved in RAW format.
• Refer to “Playback Functions and Image Editing” (p.173) for details on the
playback functions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
73
Deleting a Single Image
You can delete images one by one.
• Deleted images cannot be restored.
• Protected images cannot be deleted. (p.220)
1
Press the Q button, and display an image to delete.
3
2
Press the U/i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.
3
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Delete], and press the
100-0001
4 button.
The image is deleted.
Delete
Cancel
OK OK
• You can delete multiple images at once. Refer to “Deleting Multiple Images”
(p.184) for details.
• For the images captured with [File Format] (p.141) set to [RAW+], you can
select the file format to delete in Step 3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Shooting Functions
This chapter describes the various basic and advanced
shooting functions available with this camera.
How to Operate the Shooting Functions ...........76
Selecting the Appropriate Capture Mode ..........82
Setting the Exposure ...........................................87
Focusing .............................................................101
Checking the Depth of Field (Preview) .............114
Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent
Camera Shake ....................................................116
Taking Pictures Continuously ..........................122
Recording Movies ..............................................129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76
How to Operate the Shooting
Functions
You can change capture-related settings using the direct keys, control
panel, [A Rec. Mode] menu, [C Movie] menu or [A Custom Setting]
menu.
For details on how to use the direct keys and menus, refer to “How to Change
Function Settings” (p.37).
Direct Keys Setting Items
Press the four-way controller (2345) in
standby mode to set the following items.
4
Key
Item
Function
Page
p.87
Sensitivity
Sets the ISO sensitivity.
2
Adjusts the color balance to match the
type of the light source illuminating the
subject.
White Balance
Flash Mode
p.143
p.68
3
4
p.122
p.118
p.120
p.93
Selects Single Frame, Continuous
Shooting, Self-timer, Remote Control or
Exposure Bracketing.
Drive Mode
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
77
Rec. Mode Menu Items
The following items are available in the
[A Rec. Mode 1-4] menus.
Press the 3 button in standby mode to
display the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.
Menu
Item
Function
Page
p.171
Sets the capture mode when the mode dial
is set to B or C.
Exposure Mode *1
4
Sets the image finishing tone such as color
and contrast before shooting an image.
Custom Image *2 *3
Digital Filter *2
p.155
Applies a digital filter effect when taking pictures. p.159
Enables capturing images with high
dynamic range.
HDR Capture *2
p.149
File Format *2
Sets the file format.
A1
JPEGRecorded Sets the recording size of images saved in
Pixels *2
JPEG format.
p.140
Sets the quality of images saved in JPEG
format.
JPEG Quality *2
Color Space
AE Metering *2
AF.A *2
Sets the color space to use.
Selects the part of the sensor to use for
measuring brightness and determining
exposure.
p.97
Sets the action for l/k when
shooting with the viewfinder.
p.103
Sets whether to continue to focus on your subject
based on information from the focus points
surrounding the selected focus point if your subject p.105
briefly moves out from the selected focus point when
the focus point selection mode is set to [Select].
Expanded Area
AF
A2
*2
AF Active Area
Selects the part of the viewfinder to focus on. p.104
Sets whether to use the AF assist light when
p.103
AF Assist Light
autofocusing in dark locations.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
Menu
Item
Function
Page
p.151
Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic
aberrations occurring due to lens properties.
Lens Correction *2
Creates a picture by taking multiple
exposures and merging them into a single
image.
Multi-exposure
p.127
A2
Takes pictures at a set interval from a set
time.
Interval Shooting
p.124
p.98
bright and dark areas from occurring.
*2
D-Range Settings
High-ISO NR
Sets the Noise Reduction setting when
shooting with a high ISO sensitivity.
Slow Shutter
Speed NR
Sets the Noise Reduction setting when
shooting with a slow shutter speed.
p.100
4
Composition
Adjust.
Allows you to adjust the composition of your
image using the Shake Reduction mechanism.
A3
p.153
p.116
Shake Reduction *2 Activates the Shake Reduction function.
Sets the focal length when using a lens for
Input Focal Length which focal length information cannot be
obtained.
p.262
Sets the Live View display and focus
method settings.
Live View
p.107
p.212
p.162
Instant Review
Sets the Instant Review display settings.
E-Dial
Programming
For each exposure mode, you can set what
the front and rear dials control.
Button
Customization
Sets the function of the V/Y button and
=/L button.
p.165
p.215
p.267
A4
Determines which settings to save when the
power is turned off.
Memory
GPS
Sets the functions for when the optional
GPS unit is attached to the camera.
Saves the current camera settings as A
Save USER Mode mode so you can use them by setting the
p.168
mode dial to B or C.
*1 Appears only when the mode dial is set to B or C.
*2 Can also be set through the control panel.
*3 When the mode dial is set to H, [Scene Mode] appears instead.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
79
Movie Menu Items
The following items are available in the [C Movie 1] menu.
Press the 3 button when the mode dial is set to C to display the
[C Movie 1] menu.
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Selects the movie exposure mode
from e, c, or a mode.
Exposure Setting *1
Sets the number of recorded pixels
and size of the movie.
Recorded Pixels *1
Framerate *1
Sets the number of frames shot per
second.
4
p.129
C1
Quality Level *1
Sets the quality level of the movie.
Recording Sound Level *1 Sets the microphone sensitivity.
Activates the Movie Shake Reduction
Movie SR *1
function.
Takes still pictures at a set interval
Interval Movie
from a set time and saves it as a
single movie file.
p.133
*1 Can also be set through the control panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80
Custom Setting Menu Items
The following items of the [A Custom Setting 1-3] menus enable you to
make the best use of the camera.
Menu
Item
1. EV Steps
Function
Page
p.92
Sets the adjustment steps for
exposure.
sensitivity.
2. Sensitivity Steps
p.88
p.97
p.96
3. Meter Operating Time
4. AE-L with AF Locked
Sets the meter operating time.
Sets whether to lock the exposure
value when the focus is locked.
4
Sets whether to link the exposure
and AF point in the focusing area
when [AE Metering] is set to [Multi-
segment].
A1
5. Link AE and AF Point
p.97
Sets the order for Exposure
Bracketing shooting.
6. Bracketing Order
p.93
p.95
Sets whether to shoot three frames
with one release when using
Exposure Bracketing.
7. One-Push Bracketing
Sets the operation when pressing the
8. Bulb (B) Mode Options
9. WB When Using Flash
p.91
shutter release button in
p
mode.
Sets the white balance setting when
using the flash.
p.145
Sets whether to adjust the tungsten
light color tone when the white
balance is set to F (Auto White
Balance).
10. AWB in Tungsten Light
—
11. Color Temperature
Steps
Sets the adjustment steps for color
temperature.
A2
p.147
p.102
Sets the action priority for when the
12. AF.S Setting
13. AF.C Setting
focus mode is set to
l
and the
shutter release button is fully pressed.
Sets the action priority for
Continuous Shooting when the
focus mode is set to k.
p.103
p.121
14. AF with Remote
Control
Sets whether to use autofocus when
shooting with a remote control unit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
81
Menu
Item
Function
Page
p.71
15. Release While
Charging
Sets whether to release the shutter
while charging the built-in flash.
Sets the built-in flash discharge
method in wireless mode.
16. Flash in Wireless Mode
p.247
p.213
Sets whether to save the last menu
tab displayed on the monitor and to
display it again the next time the
3 button is pressed.
17. Save Menu Location
Enables Catch-in Focus shooting
when a manual focus lens is
attached, and the shutter is
released automatically when the
subject comes into focus.
18. Catch-in Focus
p.113
p.112
A3
4
Allows you to precisely fine tune
your lenses with the camera’s
autofocus system.
19. AF Fine Adjustment
20. Using Aperture Ring
Reset Custom Functions
Sets whether to enable shutter
release when the lens aperture ring p.263
is set to a position other than s.
Resets all the settings in the [
A
Custom Setting 1-3] menus to the
defaults.
p.217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82
Selecting the Appropriate Capture
Mode
This camera features various capture modes, enabling you to take
pictures with settings suited for your photographic vision.
In this manual, the capture modes are referred to as follows.
Capture Mode
Characteristics
Page
Automatically selects the optimal capture
mode for the subject.
n (Auto Picture) mode
Lets you choose the capture mode from
various scene styles.
H (Scene) mode
p.84
Exposure modes
(e/K/b/c/L/a/p)
Changes the shutter speed and aperture
value, and takes pictures.
p.86
4
C (Movie) mode
Records a movie.
p.131
Lets you capture images with the saved
camera settings. Up to two settings can
be saved.
A modes (B/C)
p.168
1
Turn the mode dial to set the
desired capture mode to the dial
indicator.
Dial indicator
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
83
The selected capture mode is displayed
for 3 seconds on the monitor (guide
display).
Program
Automatic Exposure
You can set the camera to not display the guides in [LCD Display] of the
[R Set-up 1] menu. (p.210)
Auto Picture Modes
4
When set to n (Auto Picture) mode, the camera automatically selects
the optimal mode from the following capture modes for the subject.
Mode
Characteristics
Standard
This mode is selected when none of the following modes apply.
U
For capturing portraits. Reproduces a healthy and bright skin
tone.
Portrait
c
For capturing landscape views. Increases color saturation
and produces a vivid color image.
Landscape
Macro
s
b
For capturing tiny objects at close focus range like flowers,
coins, jewelry, and more.
Moving
Object
For capturing images of fast moving subjects, such as at
sporting events.
\
For capturing images of people in low light conditions, such as
dusk or at night.
Night
Scene
Portrait
Even though the flash is used, the camera will use slow shutter
speeds so the background areas beyond the flash reach will
also appear correctly exposed in the picture (Slow-speed Sync
(p.240)). To prevent camera shake, either turn on the Shake
Reduction function, or mount the camera on a tripod.
.
Sunset
For capturing sunrises or sunsets in beautiful, vivid color.
K
For capturing images of blue sky. Produces a more
impressive deep blue.
Blue Sky
d
Enhances colors of trees and sunbeams through foliage and
produces a vivid color image.
Forest
x
The autofocus mode is fixed to f when shooting with the viewfinder.
(p.103) If the camera determines that \ is the optimal mode, the autofocus
mode is fixed to k, while l is used for all other modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
Scene Modes
When set to H (Scene) mode, you can choose from the following
shooting scenes.
Mode
Characteristics
For capturing portraits. Reproduces a healthy and bright skin tone.
Portrait
c
For capturing landscape views. Increases color saturation and
produces a vivid color image.
Landscape
Macro
s
For capturing tiny objects at close focus range like flowers,
coins, jewelry, and more.
b
For capturing images of fast moving subjects, such as at
sporting events.
The drive mode is fixed to [Continuous Shooting (Hi)].
Moving
Object
\
4
For capturing images of people in low light conditions, such as
dusk or at night.
Even though the flash is used, the camera will use slow shutter
speeds so the background areas beyond the flash reach will also
appear correctly exposed in the picture (Slow-speed Sync
(p.240)). To prevent camera shake, either turn on the Shake
Reduction function, or mount the camera on a tripod.
Night
Scene
Portrait
.
Sunset
For capturing sunrises or sunsets in beautiful, vivid color.
K
For capturing images of blue sky. Produces a more impressive
deep blue.
Blue Sky
d
Enhances colors of trees and sunbeams through foliage and
produces a vivid color image.
Forest
x
Night
Scene
Used for shooting at night. Use a tripod or flat surface to
prevent camera shake blur.
A
Night
Scene
HDR
Generates a single HDR image with less noise from 3 images
(-3 EV, Standard, and +3 EV) captured in dim lighting.
The file format is fixed to [JPEG].
Z
Night Snap For taking snapshots in poorly lit place.
l
For capturing images of food. Saturation will be rather high to
make it look appetizing.
Food
K
For capturing moving pets.
The drive mode is fixed to [Continuous Shooting (Hi)].
Pet
Z
R
For capturing moving kids. Reproduces healthy and bright skin tone.
The drive mode is fixed to [Continuous Shooting (Hi)].
Kids
Surf &
Snow
For capturing images of dazzling backgrounds, such as snowy
mountains.
Q
y
Backlight
Silhouette
Produces a silhouette image of subject in backlight condition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
85
Mode
Characteristics
Candlelight For capturing scenes in candlelight.
Stage
Lighting
U
n
E
For capturing moving subjects in poorly lit place.
Museum
For capturing images in places where a flash is prohibited.
The flash is deactivated in K, d, A, Z, y, U, n, and E modes. To
prevent camera shake, either turn on the Shake Reduction function, or mount
the camera on a tripod.
When shooting with the viewfinder, the autofocus mode is automatically set
according to the selected shooting scene. (p.103)
4
Selecting a Scene Mode
1
Set the mode dial to H.
The camera switches to the H mode
status screen.
1/125
200
F4.0
128
2
3
Press the M button.
The icon for the currently selected capture mode appears in the control
panel.
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select [Scene
Scene Mode
Portrait
Mode], and press the 4 button.
The Scene Mode selection screen
appears.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) or rear e-dial (S) to
choose a scene mode, and press
the 4 button.
Portrait
For cappturinngg portrraits.
Reproduces aa healthy
and brightt skinn tone
The camera returns to the control panel
and is ready to take a picture.
ġ
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
When the 3 button is pressed while
the mode dial is set to H, the item [Scene
Mode] appears on the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu. Press the four-way controller (5) to
display the Scene Mode selection screen
and you can select a scene mode in the
same way as described in Step 4.
1 2 3 4
Scene Mode
Digitall Filter
HDR Capture
Image Capturre Settings
AE Metering
4
Exit
MENU
Exposure Modes
Use the following exposure modes to change the shutter speed and
aperture value.
Mode
Characteristics
Page
Automatically sets the shutter speed and
aperture value to obtain a proper exposure
according to the program line.
Program
Automatic Exposure
e
Sensitivity Priority
Lets you set the desired sensitivity to suit
K
b
Automatic Exposure the brightness of the surroundings.
Shutter Priority Lets you set the desired shutter speed for
Automatic Exposure expressing subject movement.
p.89
Aperture Priority
Lets you set the desired aperture value for
c
Automatic Exposure controlling the depth of field.
Shutter & Aperture Automatically sets the sensitivity to obtain a
Priority
proper exposure with the set shutter speed
L
Automatic Exposure and aperture value.
Lets you set the sensitivity, shutter speed, and
aperture value to match your photographic vision.
Manual Exposure
Bulb Exposure
a
p
Lets you capture images that require slow shutter
speeds such as fireworks and night scenes.
p.91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
87
Setting the Exposure
Setting the Sensitivity
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.
The sensitivity can be set to [ISO AUTO] or within a sensitivity range
equivalent to ISO 100 to 51200. The default setting is [ISO AUTO].
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in standby mode.
The Sensitivity setting screen appears.
4
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [ISO AUTO] or [ISO].
100 - 3200
6400
Sets the range to be
adjusted automatically.
ISO AUTO
ISO
Sets a fixed value.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
3
4
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to change the sensitivity value.
For [ISO AUTO], turn the front e-dial (R) to set the minimum
sensitivity.
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88
• In L mode, or Z (Night Scene HDR)/l (Night Snap)/n (Stage Lighting)
of H mode, the sensitivity is fixed to [ISO AUTO (up to ISO 6400 for H
mode)].
• In K or p mode, [ISO AUTO] is not displayed. If the mode dial is set to p,
the sensitivity is set to the last fixed value. If the mode dial is set to a when
the sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO], the camera operates in L mode.
• More noise may appear in captured images if a higher sensitivity is set. You
can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. Set in [High-ISO NR] of
the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu. (p.98)
• You can select whether to set the sensitivity in increments of 1 EV or in
accordance with the EV step setting for exposure (p.92). This can be set in
[2. Sensitivity Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
89
Changing the Exposure Mode
This camera features the following exposure modes.
The settings available for each exposure mode are as follows.
z: Available #: Restricted ×: Not available
Change
Change
Change
EV
Exposure Mode
Shutter Speed Aperture Value Sensitivity Compensation
*1
*1
e
Program Automatic Exposure
#
#
z
z
z
Sensitivity Priority
Automatic Exposure
K
×
×
z*2
Shutter Priority
Automatic Exposure
b
c
z
×
×
z
z
×
z
z
z
4
Aperture Priority
Automatic Exposure
z
z
L Shutter & Aperture Priority
z
Automatic Exposure
a
p
Manual Exposure
Bulb Exposure
z
z
z
z*3
z*2
z
×
×
*1 In [E-Dial Programming] of the [
A
Rec. Mode 4] menu, you can make the setting so that the
shutter speed and/or aperture value can be changed by turning the front/rear e-dial. (p.162)
*2 [ISO AUTO] is not available.
*3 If the mode dial is set to a when the sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO], the camera operates
in L mode.
1
Set the mode dial to e, K, b,
c, L, a or p.
R or S appears on the status
screen for the value that can be changed.
1/2000
1600
F2.8
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90
The value that can be changed is
underlined in the viewfinder.
During Live View, 5 appears for the value
that can be changed.
1/2000 F2.8
1600
[
]
128
2
3
Turn the rear e-dial (S).
The aperture value can be changed in
c, L, a, or p mode.
4
The sensitivity can be changed in K
mode.
Turn the front e-dial (R).
The shutter speed can be changed in b,
L, or a mode.
In a mode, the difference from the proper
exposure is displayed in a bar scale while
the shutter speed or aperture value is
adjusted. The exposure value blinks red
when the difference from the proper
exposure is ±3.0 or larger.
1/125
200
F5.6
128
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
and aperture value when the sensitivity is set to a fixed value (p.87).
• For each exposure mode, you can set the functions for when the front/rear e-
dial is turned or the d button is pressed. Set in [E-Dial Programming] of the
[A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.162)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
91
Bulb Shooting
This is useful when capturing images of night scenes and fireworks which
require long exposures.
1
Set the mode dial to p (Bulb).
2
Press the shutter release button.
The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button is kept
pressed.
3
Take your finger off the shutter release button.
4
Exposure ends.
In p mode, the following functions are not available.
- Continuous Shooting
- EV Compensation
- Interval Shooting
- Shake Reduction
- Exposure Bracketing
- AE Lock
- HDR Capture
• You can set the operation of the shutter release button in p mode in [8. Bulb
(B) Mode Options] of the [A Custom Setting 2] menu.
Exposure continues while the shutter release button is
pressed. (default setting)
Mode1
Exposure starts with the first press of the shutter release button
Mode2
and ends with the second press of the shutter release button.
• More noise may appear in captured images if a slower shutter speed is set.
You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. Set in [Slow Shutter
Speed NR] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu. (p.100)
• Use a tripod and the optional cable switch or an optional remote control unit
to prevent camera shake during Bulb shooting.
• We recommend using the optional AC adapter kit as the battery drain is high
during Bulb shooting.
• When the optional GPS unit is attached and [Action in B Mode] is set to
[ASTROTRACER] in [GPS] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, the
ASTROTRACER function is activated in p mode. (p.268)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92
Adjusting the Exposure
This allows you to deliberately overexpose (brighten) or underexpose
(darken) your picture.
The compensation value can be set between -5 and +5 EV (-2 and +2 EV
in C mode). The value that can be set varies according to the step interval
set in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
EV Steps
1/3 EV
Exposure Compensation Value
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0, ±3.3, ±3.7, ±4.0,
±4.3, ±4.7, ±5.0
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0, ±3.5, ±4.0, ±4.5, ±5.0
1/2 EV
4
1
Press the m button (1), and
then turn the rear e-dial (S)
(2).
1
The exposure is adjusted.
2
m and the compensation value are
displayed in the status screen, viewfinder,
and Live View screen during adjustment.
1/90
200
F4.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
93
EV
+1.7
0
EV
1/2000 F2.8
1600
128
Available operations
m button
Starts/ends selecting the compensation value.
d button
Resets the compensation value to the default
setting.
4
• EV Compensation is not available in p mode.
• The set compensation value is not canceled by turning the camera off or by
switching to another capture mode.
Changing the Exposure Automatically when Shooting
(Exposure Bracketing)
You can take three consecutive pictures at three different exposure levels.
Standard exposure
Underexposure
Overexposure
Set the bracketing order in [6. Bracketing Order] of the [A Custom Setting
1] menu.
0 – +
– 0 +
+ 0 –
0 + –
Standard Underexposed Overexposed (default setting)
Underexposed Standard Overexposed
Overexposed Standard Underexposed
Standard Overexposed Underexposed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94
Exposure Bracketing is not available in the following situations.
• when p mode, or \ (Moving Object)/Z (Night Scene HDR)/Z (Pet)/R
(Kids) of H mode is set
• when Interval Shooting, Multi-exposure or HDR Capture is set
1
Press the four-way controller (5) in standby mode.
The Drive Mode setting screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select l.
Press the four-way controller
Exposure Bracketing
(3), and set the bracket value.
4
The value that can be set varies
according to the step interval set in [1. EV
0.7EV
Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
(p.92)
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Available operations
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y) Increases the bracket value.
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f)
Reduces the bracket value.
m button
Rear e-dial (S)
Adjusts the EV compensation value
(when taking pictures in either under-
or overexposed direction only).
d button
Resets the compensation value to the
default setting.
4
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a series of pictures.
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The EV compensation value is displayed in the status screen, viewfinder,
and Live View screen when the subject comes into focus.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
95
6
Press the shutter release button fully.
Press and hold the shutter release button until three pictures are taken.
The pictures will be taken according to the order set in [6. Bracketing
Order] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
• When the focus mode is set to l, the focus position is locked in the first
image and is used for subsequent images.
• When you take your finger off the shutter release button during Exposure
Bracketing, the exposure setting will remain effective for twice the amount of
the meter operating time (p.97) (default setting is about 20 seconds) and you
can take a picture at the next compensation value. After about twice the
amount of the meter operating time elapses, the camera returns to settings
for taking the first image.
• When [7. One-Push Bracketing] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu is set to
[On], even if the shutter release button is not continuously pressed, three
pictures are automatically taken with one press of the shutter release button.
• Select [Single Frame Shooting] in the Drive Mode setting screen to cancel
Exposure Bracketing. The setting is canceled automatically when the camera
is turned off if you clear the check box for [Drive Mode] in [Memory] of the [A
Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.215)
4
• You can combine Exposure Bracketing with the built-in flash or an external
flash (P-TTL auto only) to continuously change only the flash output.
• If you use Exposure Bracketing frequently, you can assign it to the |/Y
button. (p.165)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting (AE
Lock)
AE Lock is a function that locks the exposure (brightness) prior to taking a
picture. Use this when the subject is too small to obtain a proper exposure
or is backlit.
1
Assign [AE Lock] to the =/L button.
Refer to “Setting the =/L Button Operation” (p.167) for details.
2
Set the exposure, and press the
=/L button.
4
The camera locks the exposure at that
instant.
@ is displayed in the status screen,
viewfinder, and Live View screen while
the AE Lock is engaged.
Press the =/L button again to
cancel AE Lock.
• The exposure remains locked in the following situations.
• while the =/L button is pressed
• while the shutter release button is pressed halfway
• for twice the amount of the meter operating time (p.97)
• You will hear a beep when AE Lock is activated and deactivated. The beep
can be turned off. (p.206)
• AE Lock is not available in p mode.
• If you want to also lock the exposure when the focus is locked, set [4. AE-L
with AF Locked] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu to [On].
• When a mode is set, if the shutter speed or aperture value is changed while
AE Lock is engaged, the combination of shutter speed and aperture value
changes while the exposure remains the same.
• When using a zoom lens whose maximum aperture varies depending on the
focal length, the combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes
depending on the zooming position even while AE Lock is engaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
97
Selecting the Metering Method
Choose the part of the sensor to use for measuring brightness and
determining exposure.
The sensor meters the brightness in multiple zones. (default setting)
Multi-
segment
L
M
Even in backlit locations, this mode automatically determines what level
of brightness is in which portion and automatically adjusts exposure.
Metering is weighted at the center of the sensor.
The sensitivity increases at the center and no automatic
adjustment is performed even during backlit scenes.
Center-
weighted
The brightness is measured only within a limited area at the center
of the sensor. You can use this in combination with AE Lock (p.96)
when a subject is too small to obtain a correct exposure.
N Spot
4
1
Press the M button in standby mode.
The control panel appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [AE
Metering], and press the 4 button.
The [AE Metering] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a metering method, and
AE Metering
Multi-ssegment
press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.
• Exposure metering is performed immediately after the camera is turned on or
when the capture mode is changed. Set the length of meter operating time in
[3. Meter Operating Time] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. Select from
[10sec.] (default setting), [3sec.] or [30sec.].
• In [5. Link AE and AF Point] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu, you can link
the exposure and AF point in the focusing area when L is selected.
Exposure for multi-segment metering is determined regardless of
the AF point. (default setting)
Off
On Exposure for multi-segment metering is adjusted according to the AF point.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98
Reducing the Image Noise (Noise Reduction)
When shooting with a digital camera, image noise (image roughness or
unevenness) becomes noticeable in the following situations.
• when shooting with a high sensitivity setting
• when shooting with long exposures
• when the temperature of the CMOS sensor is high
You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction.
Pictures cannot be taken while the camera is performing a noise reduction
process. In particular, if you use [Slow Shutter Speed NR], it may take more
time to process.
4
High-ISO NR
Reduces noise at high ISO sensitivity settings.
1
Select [High-ISO NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu, and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [High-ISO NR] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
(5), and use the four-way
controller (23) to select a
High-ISO NR
Auto
Low
Medium
setting.
High
Custom
Off
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Applies Noise Reduction at optimally calculated levels
throughout ISO range. (default setting)
Auto
Applies Noise Reduction at constant chosen level
throughout ISO range.
Low/Medium/High
Applies Noise Reduction at user-defined levels for
each ISO setting.
Custom
Off
Does not apply Noise Reduction at any ISO setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
99
3
4
Press the 4 button.
If you select [Auto], [Low], [Medium], [High] or [Off], proceed to Step 7.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Setting], and
press the four-way controller (5).
The screen to set the noise reduction level according to the ISO
sensitivity appears.
5
Use the four-way controller (23)
High-ISO NR
1 2
to select a sensitivity value, and
use the four-way controller (45)
to set the level of noise reduction
which is applied to the selected
sensitivity value.
100
200
400
800
4
1600
3200
6400
Reset
MENU
The sensitivity values displayed vary
according to the [1. EV Steps] and
[2. Sensitivity Steps] settings made in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
Available operations
Rear e-dial (S)
Switches between [High-ISO NR 1] and [High-ISO
NR 2].
d button
Resets the set value to the default setting.
6
7
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Reduces noise during long exposures.
1
Select [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 3]
menu, and press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a setting, and press the
4 button.
1 2 3 4
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Compoositiioon Adjust.
Shake Reduction
Input Focaal Length
4
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Determines conditions such as shutter speed, sensitivity, and the
camera’s internal temperature, and automatically applies Noise
Reduction as necessary. (default setting)
Auto
Applies Noise Reduction when the shutter speed exceeds 1
second.
On
Off
Does not apply Noise Reduction.
3
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
101
Focusing
Setting the Focus Mode
Set the focus mode switch to l, A, or \.
4
The autofocus methods for shooting with the viewfinder differ from those
for shooting with Live View.
TTL phase-matching autofocus:
Select from l, k, or f mode which
enables automatically switching between l
Shooting with the viewfinder
Shooting with Live View
and k. (p.102) Set the focusing point in [AF
Active Area]. (p.104)
Faster autofocus performance than “contrast
detection AF” is possible.
Contrast detection AF:
Face detection and tracking are available.
(p.106)
The camera behaves the same whether the
focus mode switch is set to l or A.
Refer to “Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)” (p.110) for details
on \ mode.
If [Enable AF1] or [Enable AF2] is assigned to the =/L button, you can
set the camera so that pressing the=/L button focuses automatically, in
the same way as pressing the shutter release button halfway. By default, both
pressing the shutter release button halfway and using the =/L button
can perform autofocus. (p.167)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102
Autofocus Modes when Shooting with the Viewfinder
The following autofocus modes can be selected when shooting with the
viewfinder.
When the shutter release button is pressed halfway and the
subject comes into focus, the focus is locked (focus lock) at
that position. If the subject is outside the focusing area, focus
the camera on the subject in the focusing area, lock the focus
at that position (focus lock), and then recompose your picture.
• The focus mode is fixed to l in c (Portrait)/s (Landscape)/
b (Macro)/. (Night Scene Portrait)/x (Forest)/A (Night
Scene)/Z (Night Scene HDR)/K (Food)/K (Sunset)/Q (Surf
& Snow)/y (Backlight Silhouette)/U (Candlelight)/E
(Museum) of H mode.
l
Single mode
4
• The AF assist light turns on as necessary.
• You can set the action priority for when the shutter release
button is pressed fully in [12. AF.S Setting] of the [A Custom
Setting 2] menu.
The shutter cannot be released until the subject is
in focus. (default setting)
Focus-
If the subject is too close to the camera, move back
priority
and take the picture. If the subject is difficult to
focus, adjust the focus manually.
Release- The shutter can be released even if the subject is
priority
not in focus.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
103
The subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the
shutter release button is pressed halfway. The focus indicator
] appears and you will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus. The shutter can be released even if the subject is
not in focus.
• Available only when the mode dial is set to e, K, b, c,
L, a or p.
• The focus mode is fixed to k in \ (Moving Object)/
l (Night Snap)/Z (Pet)/R (Kids)/n (Stage Lighting) of H
mode.
A (k)
Continuous
mode
•
When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus, the
camera tracks the subject if it is determined to be a moving object.
• You can set the action priority for Continuous Shooting in [13.
AF.C Setting] of the [A Custom Setting 2] menu.
Takes pictures giving priority to keeping the
subject in focus during Continuous Shooting.
(default setting)
Focus-
priority
4
FPS-
priority
Takes pictures giving priority to the shooting speed
during Continuous Shooting.
Switches automatically between l and k modes
according to the subject. Set in [AF.A] of [AF Settings] in the
[A Rec. Mode 2] menu.
Operates as specified by the camera’s external focus
mode switch. (default setting)
P
Operates as f, overriding the external focus mode
switch.
f
Auto mode
O
• The focus mode is fixed to f in n mode.
• In H mode, f is not available because the focus mode is
automatically set depending on the scene mode selected.
• Even if f is selected, the focus mode is fixed to l during
Live View shooting in e, K, b, c, L, a or p mode.
If you do not want to use the AF assist light in l mode, you can turn it off
by clearing the check box for [AF Assist Light] in [AF Settings] of the [A Rec.
Mode 2] menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104
Selecting the Focusing Point (AF Point)
Sets the focusing point when shooting with the viewfinder.
Auto (5 AF Out of the 5 AF points, the camera selects the optimum AF
b
Points)
point even if the subject is not centered. (default setting)
Auto (11 AF Out of the 11 AF points, the camera selects the optimum AF
c
Points)
Select
Spot
point even if the subject is not centered.
Sets the focusing point to the user selected point from eleven
points in the AF frame.
S
O
Sets the focusing point to the center of the viewfinder.
4
1
Press the M button in standby mode.
The control panel appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [AF Active
Area], and press the 4 button.
The [AF Active Area] screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (45)
AF Activve Area
Auto (5 AFF Points)
to select a focus point selection
mode, and press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
AUTO
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
• You can also change the setting from [AF Active Area] in [AF Settings] of the
[A Rec. Mode 2] menu.
• The focus point selection mode is fixed to O regardless of this setting when
using lenses other than DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lenses.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
105
Selecting the Desired Focusing Point
1
Select S in Step 3 on p.104, and press the 4 button.
2
Press the 3 button or the shutter release button
halfway.
The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.
3
Select the desired AF point.
1/30
400
F4.5
4
128
Available operations
Four-way controller (2345)
4 button
Changes the AF point.
Press and hold 4 button
Disables changing the AF point and
enables direct key operation of the four-
way controller.
To enable changing the AF point, press
the 4 button again while direct key
operation is enabled.
• The position of the changed AF point is stored even if the focus point
selection mode is switched to b, c or O, or the camera is turned off.
•
If [AF Active Area] is assigned to the
V
/
Y
button in [Button
Customization] of the [ Rec. Mode 4] menu (p.165), press the
A
V/Y
button to enable or disable changing the AF point, and turn the front/rear e-
dial to change the AF point as in Step 4. You can select the upper or lower AF
point with the front e-dial (
Press the button to return the AF point to the center of the AF frame. This
is useful when operating the camera while looking through the viewfinder.
R), and the left or right with the rear e-dial (S).
d
• When [Expanded Area AF] in [AF Settings] of the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu is
enabled, if your subject briefly moves out from the focus point that was
selected when the focus mode was set to k (or when [AF.A] was
enabled), the camera will continue to focus on your subject based on
information from the focus points (back-up focus points) surrounding the
selected focus point. The back-up focus points are displayed in pink on the
status screen.
• You will hear a beep when switching between enabling or disabling changing
the AF point. The beep can be turned off. (p.206)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106
Setting the Contrast AF during Live View
You can select from the following autofocus methods when shooting with
Live View.
Detects and tracks faces of people. (default setting)
Face
Detection
D
E
The main face detection frame for autofocus and auto
exposure is displayed in yellow.
Tracks the subject in focus when the shutter release button is
pressed halfway.
Tracking
Focuses on a desired area.
The sensor is divided into 100 areas (10 horizontal by 10
vertical), and you can select a wider or narrower focusing area
by using 4, 16, or 36 of those 100 available areas. (p.108)
G
H
Select
Spot
4
Focuses on a limited area at the center.
1
Press the M button in standby mode.
The control panel appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Contrast
AF], and press the 4 button.
The [Contrast AF] screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (45)
Contrast AF
Face Deteection
to select the desired mode and
press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
107
• You can also change the setting from [Contrast AF] in [Live View] of the [A
Rec. Mode 4] menu.
• [Contrast AF] is fixed to D in U (Standard)/c (Portrait)/. (Night Scene
Portrait) of n mode or c (Portrait)/. (Night Scene Portrait)/R (Kids) of
H mode.
• To lock the focus and recompose the picture, select G or H.
• To take pictures when the subject is not in focus, set [12. AF.S Setting] to
[Release-priority] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu.
• You can set whether to display a grid, info
Live View
overlay, histogram, and bright/dark area
Contrast AF
warning during Live View in [Live View] of
AF Autoozoom
the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu. When [Info
Focuss Peaking
Overlay] is disabled, the indicators which
Grid Dissplay
Info Ovverlay
Histograam Display
provide shooting information are not
displayed. (Press the shutter release
button halfway to display the shutter speed,
aperture value, sensitivity and number of
recordable still pictures.)
Bright/Dark Area
4
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108
Selecting the Desired Focusing Area
You can set the range of the autofocusing area (AF area).
1
Select G in Step 3 on p.106, and press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
2
Press the 3 button or the shutter release button
halfway.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
3
4
Press the U/i button.
4
The Live View image is displayed on the monitor.
Press the 4 button.
The range of the selectable area is displayed with broken lines and a
rectangle appears on it. You can set the AF area by changing the position
and size of this rectangle.
5
Select the AF area.
OK OK
Available operations
Four-way controller
Changes the position of the AF area.
(2345)
Rear e-dial (S)
Changes the size of the AF area.
Returns the AF area to the center.
d button
6
Press the 4 button.
The AF area is set.
The set AF area is saved in the memory even if the Contrast AF setting is
changed or the camera is turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
109
Checking the Focus
When shooting with Live View, you can check the focus lock position by
magnifying the image on the monitor, centering around the area in focus.
1
View the subject on the monitor, and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
2
Press the 4 button while keeping the shutter release
button pressed halfway.
4
While the shutter release button is pressed halfway, the image on the
monitor is magnified centering around the AF point.
3
4
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to
change the magnification.
Magnification can be selected from x2, x4
or x6.
x2
Press the 4 button or stop pressing the shutter release
button halfway.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• When [AF Autozoom] is enabled in [Live View] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu,
the camera automatically magnifies the image 1 second after the focus is
locked.
• In \ mode, the image can be magnified by simply pressing the 4 button.
(p.111)
The image cannot be magnified when [Contrast AF] is set to [Tracking].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110
Adjusting the Focus Manually
(Manual Focus)
While looking through the viewfinder or viewing the Live View screen, turn
the focusing ring until the subject is clearly visible. In \ mode, the shutter
can be released by pressing the shutter release button fully even if the
subject is not in focus.
Focusing Using the Viewfinder
You can manually adjust the focus using the matte field in viewfinder.
4
1
Set the focus mode switch to \.
2
Look through the viewfinder and
turn the focusing ring.
If the focusing ring is turned while
pressing the shutter release button
halfway, the focus indicator ] appears
and you will hear a beep when the subject
comes into focus.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
111
Focusing Using Live View
1
Set the focus mode switch to \.
2
While viewing the monitor, turn
the focusing ring.
4
3
When it is difficult to check the focus, press the 4
button.
The image on the monitor is magnified.
x4
Available operations
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y) Magnifies the image (up to 6 times)
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f) Reduces the image (up to 2 times)
Four-way controller (2345)
Changes the display area.
d button
Changes the display area to the center.
4
Press the 4 button or the shutter release button
halfway.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
When [Focus Peaking] is enabled in [Live View] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu,
the outline of the subject in focus is emphasized and makes it easier to check
the focus. If you switch to = mode after enabling Focus Peaking in \ mode,
Focus Peaking also works in = mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112
AF Fine Adjustment
You can precisely fine tune your lenses with the camera’s autofocus
system.
• Be sure to use [AF Fine Adjustment] only when necessary. Care should
be taken as adjusting the autofocus may make it difficult to capture
images with the appropriate focus.
• Any camera shake during test shooting may make it difficult to obtain the
accurate focusing position. Therefore, always use a tripod when taking test
shots.
1
Select [19. AF Fine Adjustment] in the [A Custom Setting
3] menu, and press the four-way controller (5).
4
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [On], and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [19. AF Fine Adjustment] screen appears.
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Apply All] or
[Apply One].
Apply All Applies the same adjustment value to all lenses.
This item will appear only when the lens ID is obtained. Saves
Apply One and applies a different adjustment value for each lens type.
(Up to 20 lens types)
Reset
Resets the saved adjustment value to the default setting.
Press the four-way controller
AF Fine Adjjustment
19.
(5), and adjust the value.
Apply All
0
Apply One
Unset
Reset
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
113
Available operations
Four-way controller (5)/
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y)
Adjusts the focus to a closer position.
Adjusts the focus to a farther position.
Four-way controller (4)/
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f)
| button
Resets the adjustment value to the
default setting.
5
6
7
Press the 4 button.
The adjustment value is saved.
Press the 3 button three times.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
4
Take a test picture.
You can easily check focus accuracy by magnifying the image during
Live View (p.109) or Digital Preview (p.115).
Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode
When [18. Catch-in Focus] of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu is set
to [On] and one of the following types of lenses is attached, Catch-in
Focus shooting is enabled and the shutter is released automatically
when the subject comes into focus.
• Manual focus lens
• DA or FA lens that has both = and \ settings on the lens (the
setting must be set to \ before shooting)
How to Take Pictures
1 Set the focus mode switch to l.
Disable f (Autofocus/Auto) by clearing the check box for
[AF.A].
2 Set the focus on a position the subject will pass.
3 Press the shutter release button fully.
The shutter is released automatically when the subject comes
into focus at the set position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114
Checking the Depth of Field (Preview)
You can use the preview function to check depth of field, composition,
exposure and focus before taking a picture.
There are two preview methods.
Preview Method
Optical Preview
Description
For checking the depth of field with the viewfinder.
|
For checking the composition, exposure and
focus on the monitor.
Digital Preview
e
Optical Preview is always used for Interval Shooting and Multi-exposure.
4
Displaying the Optical Preview
1
Assign [Optical Preview] to the V/Y button.
Refer to “Setting the V/Y Button Operation” (p.165) for details.
2
3
Look through the viewfinder to focus on the subject.
Press the V/Y button while
looking through the viewfinder.
You can check the depth of field in the
viewfinder while the V/Y button is
pressed.
During this operation, no shooting
information is displayed in the viewfinder,
and the shutter cannot be released.
4
Take your finger off the V/Y button.
Optical Preview is ended and the camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
115
Displaying the Digital Preview
1
Assign [Digital Preview] to the V/Y button.
Refer to “Setting the V/Y Button Operation” (p.165) for details.
2
Focus on the subject, and press the V/Y button.
| appears on the monitor during preview
and you can check the composition,
exposure and focus.
4
Available operations
Rear e-dial (S)
Magnifies the preview image. (p.177)
Saves the preview image.
m button
3
Press the shutter release button halfway.
Digital Preview is ended and the autofocus system operates.
The maximum display time for Digital Preview is 60 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
Using the Shake Reduction Function
to Prevent Camera Shake
Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction
Function
The Shake Reduction function reduces camera shake that occurs when
the shutter release button is pressed.
The Shake Reduction function works effectively when taking pictures in
the following situations.
• when taking pictures in dimly lit locations, such as indoors, at night,
on cloudy days and in the shade
• when taking telephoto pictures
4
• The Shake Reduction function does not work for blurring caused by subject
movement. To take pictures of a moving subject, increase the shutter speed.
• The Shake Reduction function may not fully reduce camera shake when
taking close-up shots. In this case, it is recommended to deactivate the
Shake Reduction function and use the camera with a tripod.
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work when shooting with a very
slow shutter speed, for example when panning or capturing images of night
scenes. In this case, it is recommended to deactivate the Shake Reduction
function and use the camera with a tripod.
• The Shake Reduction function is available with any PENTAX lens compatible
with this camera. However, be sure to set the focal length before using a lens
for which focal length information cannot be automatically obtained. Refer to
“Functions Available with Various Lens Combinations” (p.259) for details.
Reducing Vertical and Horizontal Camera Shake
1
Press the M button in standby mode.
The control panel appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Shake
Reduction], and press the 4 button.
The [Shake Reduction] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
117
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select Q or R, and press the
4 button.
Shake Reduction
On
The camera returns to the control panel.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Uses Shake Reduction. (default setting)
Does not use Shake Reduction.
Q
R
Press the shutter release button halfway.
4
The Shake Reduction function is
activated, and k appears in the status
screen, viewfinder, and Live View screen.
• The Shake Reduction function is not available in the following situations.
- Self-timer shooting
- Remote Control shooting
- when p mode is set
- when HDR Capture is set, and the Auto Align function is disabled
- during Composition Adjustment
• The Shake Reduction function is activated in Z (Night Scene HDR) of H
mode (except when shooting with the self-timer).
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work (for about 2 seconds)
immediately after the camera is turned on or is restored from Auto Power Off.
Wait for the Shake Reduction function to become stable before shooting.
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118
Shooting with the Self-timer
Self-timer The shutter is released after about 12 seconds. Use this mode
g
(12 sec.)
to include the photographer in the picture.
The shutter is released about 2 seconds after the shutter release
button is pressed. Use this mode to avoid camera shake when
the shutter release button is pressed.
Self-timer
(2 sec.)
Z
Shooting with the self-timer is not available in \ (Moving Object)/Z (Pet)/R
(Kids) of H mode.
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.
4
2
Press the four-way controller (5) in standby mode.
The Drive Mode setting screen appears.
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.
Press the four-way controller
Self-timer (12 sec.)
(3), use the four-way controller
(45) to select g or Z, and press
the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
119
6
Press the shutter release button
fully.
For g, the self-timer lamp starts blinking
slowly and then blinks rapidly 2 seconds
before the shutter is released. A beep is
heard and the rate increases. The shutter
will be released about 12 seconds after
the shutter release button is pressed fully.
For Z, the shutter will be released about 2 seconds after the shutter
release button is pressed fully.
• Select [Single Frame Shooting] in the Drive Mode setting screen to cancel
shooting with the self-timer. The setting is canceled automatically when the
camera is turned off if you clear the check box for [Drive Mode] in [Memory]
of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.215)
4
• The Shake Reduction function is not available.
• You can set the camera so that the beep does not sound. (p.206)
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder (except in a
mode). Use the AE Lock function (p.96) or attach the optional ME viewfinder
cap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120
Shooting with a Remote Control Unit
(Optional)
The shutter can be released from a distance by using an optional remote
control unit.
The shutter is released immediately after the shutter
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
Remote Control
h
i
Remote Control
(3 sec. delay)
The shutter is released about 3 seconds after the shutter
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
Shooting with a remote control unit is not available in the following situations.
• when \ (Moving Object)/Z (Pet)/R (Kids) of H mode is set
• when Interval Shooting is set
4
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.
2
Press the four-way controller (5) in standby mode.
The Drive Mode setting screen appears.
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select h.
Press the four-way controller
Remote Coontrol
(3), use the four-way controller
(45) to select h or i, and press
the 4 button.
The remote control receiver on the front
of the camera will blink and the camera is
in a standby status.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
121
6
Point the remote control unit
towards the remote control
receiver on the front of the
camera, and press the shutter
release button on the remote
control unit.
4 m
The maximum operating distance of a
remote control unit is about 4 m from the front of the camera.
After a picture is taken, the remote control receiver lights for 2 seconds
and then returns to blinking.
• By default, you cannot adjust the focus with a remote control unit. Focus on
the subject first with the camera before operating with a remote control unit.
When [14. AF with Remote Control] is set to [On] in the [A Custom Setting 2]
menu, you can use a remote control unit to adjust the focus.
• Select [Single Frame Shooting] in the Drive Mode setting screen to cancel
shooting with a remote control unit. The setting is canceled automatically
when the camera is turned off if you clear the check box for [Drive Mode] in
[Memory] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.215)
4
• The Shake Reduction function is not available.
• When i is selected, the flash mode cannot be set to [Wireless Mode].
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder (except in a
mode). Use the AE Lock function (p.96) or attach the optional ME viewfinder
cap.
• Shooting with a remote control unit may not be available in backlit conditions.
• When using the Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1, the autofocus system
can be operated with the S button. The { button cannot be used.
• The Remote Control F can send a remote control signal about 30,000 times.
Contact a PENTAX Service Center to replace the battery (this will involve a
fee).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
Taking Pictures Continuously
Continuous Shooting
Pictures can be taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully
pressed.
Continuous
Shooting (Hi)
Takes pictures continuously at high speed.
Takes pictures continuously at slow speed.
g
h
Continuous
Shooting (Lo)
4
• Continuous Shooting is not available in the following situations.
• when Z (Night Scene HDR) of H mode, or p mode is set
• when Interval Shooting or HDR Capture is set
• When g or h is set, you cannot save RAW images during Instant Review or
playback.
1
Press the four-way controller (5) in standby mode.
The Drive Mode setting screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.
Press the four-way controller
Continnuous SShhootinng (Hi)
(3), use the four-way controller
(45) to select g or h, and press
the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take pictures
continuously.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
123
5
Press the shutter release button fully.
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully
pressed. Take your finger off the shutter release button to stop.
• The capture mode is fixed to g in \ (Moving Object)/Z (Pet)/R (Kids) of
H mode.
• If the focus mode is set to l, the focus position is locked in the first frame
and pictures are taken continuously at the same interval.
• If the focus mode is set to k, focusing is continuously activated during
Continuous Shooting.
• The shutter cannot be released until charging is complete when using the
built-in flash. Set [15. Release While Charging] to [On] in the [A Custom
Setting 3] menu to enable shutter release before the built-in flash is ready.
• Select [Single Frame Shooting] in the Drive Mode setting screen to cancel
Continuous Shooting. The setting is canceled automatically when the camera
is turned off if you clear the check box for [Drive Mode] in [Memory] of the [A
Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.215)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124
Interval Shooting
Takes pictures at a set interval from a set time.
The following items can be set.
Interval
Set the time interval between shots from 3 seconds to 24 hours.
Set from 2 to 999.
The number of pictures that can be set varies depending on the shooting
conditions such as the amount of available space on the SD Memory Card.
Number of
Shots
Start
Interval
Select whether to take the first picture now or at a set time. Selecting [Now]
starts shooting immediately. When [Set Time] is selected, set [Start Time].
Start Time Set the time at which to start shooting.
4
Interval Shooting is not available in the following situations.
• when p mode or C mode is set
• when Multi-exposure is set
1
Select [Interval Shooting] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu,
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Interval Shooting] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Interval], and
press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (45)
Interval SShooting
to select hours, minutes, or
Start shhooting
seconds, and use the four-way
controller (23) to set the time.
Interval
00:00'03"
002 images
Now
Number off Shots
Start Intterval
Start Time
Press the 4 button to complete the
setting.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of
Shots], and press the four-way controller (5).
Press the four-way controller (45), and use the four-way
controller (23) to select the number of shots to be taken.
Press the 4 button to complete the setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
125
6
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Interval],
and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Now] or [Set
Time], and press the 4 button.
If you selected [Now], proceed to Step 10.
8
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Time],
and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (45) to select hours or
minutes, and use the four-way controller (23) to set the
time.
4
Press the 4 button to complete the setting.
10 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
shooting], and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a series of interval pictures.
11 Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
12 Press the shutter release button fully.
When [Start Interval] is set to [Now], the first picture is taken. When set
to [Set Time], shooting starts at the set time.
For shooting multiple pictures, pictures are taken at the interval set in
Step 3.
To cancel shooting, press the 3 button.
After the set number of pictures are taken, [Interval Shooting complete]
is displayed, and the camera returns to normal standby mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126
• Refer to “Interval Movie” (p.133) for information on how to perform Interval
Shooting in C mode.
• If the mode dial or the main switch is turned while shooting, the pictures that
have been already taken are saved and Interval Shooting is ended.
• [Single Frame Shooting] is used regardless of the current drive mode setting.
• If the subject is not in focus with the focus mode set to l or the previous
image processing cannot be completed before taking the next picture, no
picture may be taken.
• Although each shot taken is displayed with Instant Review, they cannot be
magnified, deleted, or saved in RAW format.
• The monitor turns off during the intervals between shots.
• If the Auto Power Off function turns the camera off before starting Interval
Shooting, the camera automatically turns on again when the shooting time
approaches.
4
When using Interval Shooting, use the optional AC adapter kit or install a fully
charged battery. If the battery becomes depleted during Interval Shooting,
recording may stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
127
Multi-exposure
You can create a picture by taking multiple exposures and merging them
into a single image.
Multi-exposure is not available in the following situations.
• when Z (Night Scene HDR) of H mode, or C mode is set
• when Interval Shooting, Digital Filter or HDR Capture is set
1
Select [Multi-exposure] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu, and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Multi-exposure] screen appears.
4
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of
Shots], and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)
Multi-exxposure
to select the number of shots,
Start shhooting
and press the 4 button.
Number off Shots
2 times
Auto EV Adjjustment
Select from 2 to 9 shots.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto EV
Adjustment], and use the four-way controller (45) to
select P or O.
When set to O, the exposure is adjusted according to the number of
shots.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
shooting], and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a series of pictures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
6
7
Take the picture.
The composite picture is displayed in Instant Review each time the
shutter release button is pressed.
The following operations can be performed during Instant Review.
Available operations
U/i button
Discards pictures taken up to that point and takes
pictures again from the first frame.
3 button
Saves pictures taken up to that point and cancels
shooting.
When the above operations are performed or after the set number of
shots are taken, the screen in Step 3 appears again.
4
Press the 3 button twice.
Multi-exposure is ended.
Exposure Bracketing and Lens Correction are not available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
129
Recording Movies
This camera enables you to record movies with the following format.
• Sound
Monaural
• File format
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 (File extension: .MOV)
Changing the Settings for Movie Recording
Settings for recording movies can be changed using the [C Movie] menu
or the control panel.
Below, how to change the settings from the [C Movie 1] menu is
explained as an example.
4
1
Set the mode dial to C, and press the 3 button.
The [C Movie 1] menu appears.
1
Turn the front e-dial (R) if you pressed
Exposure Setting
Movie Capture Settings
the 3 button in any other capture
mode.
Recording Soound LLevel
Movie SR
Intervaal Movie
Exit
MENU
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Exposure
Setting], and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select e, c or a,
and press the 4 button.
Sets the exposure automatically. Allows you to adjust the EV
compensation value. (default setting)
e
Allows you to set the aperture and EV compensation values.
c
a
Allows you to set the shutter speed, aperture value, and sensitivity.
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie Capture
Settings], and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Movie Capture Settings] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130
5
6
Select [Recorded Pixels].
Display
Recorded Pixels
Aspect Ratio
Frame Rate (fps)
Resolution
a (default setting) 1920×1080
30/25/24
K
K
I
b
c
1280×720
640×480
60/50/30/25/24
30/25/24
When the setting is changed, the amount of recordable time for that
setting appears at the top right of the screen.
Select [Framerate].
The frame rates that can be selected vary depending on the recorded pixels.
4
7
Set [Quality Level] to [C], [D], or [E].
8
Press the 3 button.
The [C Movie 1] menu appears.
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Recording
Sound Level], and use the four-way controller (45) to
select the recording sound level.
Set in the range from 0 to 5.
Sound is not recorded when l (0) is selected.
10 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie SR],
and press the four-way controller (5).
11 Use the four-way controller (23) to select Q or R, and
press the 4 button.
Q
R
Uses Movie Shake Reduction. (default setting)
Does not use Movie Shake Reduction.
12 Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to record a movie.
The settings described in this section can also be set through the control panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
131
Recording Movies
1
Set the mode dial to C.
Live View for movie recording is displayed.
Recording Sound Level Movie SR
2
View the subject on the monitor.
Change the exposure setting as
necessary.
4
10'30"
Recordable Time
Available operations
Rear e-dial (S)
Exposure Setting
c/a: Adjusts the aperture value
(only before shooting).
Front e-dial (R)
Exposure Setting a: Adjusts the shutter speed.
m button
Exposure Setting e/c: Adjusts the EV
Rear e-dial (S)
compensation value (±2 EV).
Four-way controller (2) Exposure Setting
a: Adjusts the sensitivity setting.
3
4
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode switch is set to \, turn the focusing ring until the
subject is clearly visible on the focusing screen.
Press the shutter release button fully.
Movie recording starts.
A red P displayed at the top right of the screen blinks during movie
recording.
Press the shutter release button again.
Movie recording stops.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132
• When [Recording Sound Level] is set to a value other than l (0), the camera
operation sounds are also recorded. When recording a movie, mount the
camera onto a tripod and do not operate the camera while recording.
• The flash is not available.
• When recording a movie using an image processing function such as Digital
Filter, some frames may be omitted from the recorded movie.
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high during movie
recording, the camera may be turned off automatically to protect the camera
circuitry.
• When recording a movie, regardless of the focus mode setting, recording
starts when the shutter release button is pressed fully even if the subject is
not in focus.
• You can record a movie continuously up to 4 GB or 25 minutes. When the SD
Memory Card is full, recording stops and the movie is saved.
• The screen display in C mode is set according to the [Live View] setting
made in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.107)
4
• You can set the functions for when the front/rear e-dial is turned or the d
button is pressed in [E-Dial Programming] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
(p.162)
adapter kit is recommended.
• You can also use an optional remote control unit to record a movie. (p.120)
Press the four-way controller (5) in C mode to display the screen for setting
whether to use the remote control instead of the normal Drive Mode setting
screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
133
Interval Movie
Takes still pictures at a set interval from a set time and saves them as a
single movie file (Motion JPEG, file extension: .AVI).
The following items can be set.
Select from 3 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min., 10
min., 30 min., or 1 hour.
Interval
Set the duration of recording from 12 seconds to 99 hours. The
Recording Time
time that can be set varies depending on the [Interval] setting.
Select whether to take the first picture now or at a set time.
Start Interval
Start Time
Selecting [Now] starts shooting immediately. When [Set Time]
is selected, set [Start Time].
4
Set the time at which to start shooting.
Interval Movie is available only when the mode dial is set to C.
1
Select [Interval Movie] in the [C Movie 1] menu, and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Interval Movie] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Interval], and
press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)
Intervaal Movie
to select the shooting interval,
Start shhooting
and press the 4 button.
Interval
3sec.
Recordingg Time
Start Intterval
Start Time
00:00'12"
Now
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Recording
Time], and press the four-way controller (5).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select hours,
minutes, or seconds, and use the four-way controller
(23) to set the time.
Press the 4 button to complete the setting.
6
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Interval],
and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Now] or [Set
Time], and press the 4 button.
If you selected [Now], proceed to Step 10.
4
8
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Time],
and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (45) to select hours or
minutes, and use the four-way controller (23) to set the
time.
Press the 4 button to complete the setting.
10 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
shooting], and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to record a movie.
11 Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
12 Press the shutter release button fully.
When [Start Interval] is set to [Now], a picture is taken immediately,
Instant Review is displayed, and then the monitor turns off.
After the set number of pictures are taken, [Interval Shooting complete]
is displayed, and the camera returns to normal standby mode.
When recording with Interval Movie, use the optional AC adapter kit or install a
fully charged battery. If the battery becomes depleted during Interval Movie
recording, recording may stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
135
Playing Back Movies
Recorded movies can be played back in playback mode in the same
manner as saved still pictures.
1
Select the movie to play back in the single image display
of playback mode.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.
2
Press the four-way controller
(2).
4
Movie playback starts.
10'00"
Available operations
Four-way controller (2) Pauses/resumes playback.
Four-way controller (5) Forwards a frame (when paused).
Press and hold four-way Fast-forwards playback.
controller (5)
Four-way controller (4) Reverses a frame (when paused).
Press and hold four-way Fast-reverses playback.
controller (4)
Four-way controller (3) Stops playback.
Displays the playback mode palette (when
stopped). (p.174)
Rear e-dial (S)
Adjusts the volume (6 levels).
M button
Switches between [Standard Information Display]
and [No Information Display].
m button
Saves the image on the monitor as a JPEG file
(when paused). (p.136).
When the movie ends, playback stops and the first frame is displayed again.
• Use an optional AV cable to play back recorded movies on a TV screen or
other AV devices. (p.200)
• QuickTime is required to play back movies transferred to a computer. (p.232)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
Capturing a Still Picture from a Movie
You can capture a single frame from a movie and save it as a JPEG still
picture.
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in Step 2 on p.135 to
pause the movie.
Frame number/
Total number of frames
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
still picture.
90/18000
4
10'00"
3
4
Press the m button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as], and
press the 4 button.
The captured image from the movie is saved in JPEG format.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
137
Editing Movies
Movies can be divided and unwanted segments can be deleted.
1
Select the movie to play back in the single image display
of playback mode.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [ (Movie
Edit), and press the 4 button.
4
The movie editing screen appears.
4
Select a point where you want to
divide the movie.
The first frame at the dividing point is
displayed at the top of the screen.
00'00"
10'00"
Up to four points can be selected to divide
the original movie into five segments.
Stop
OK OK
MENU
INFO
Available operations
Four-way controller (2)
Plays back/pauses a movie.
Four-way controller (5)
Forwards a frame (when paused).
Fast-forwards playback.
Press and hold four-way
controller (5)
Four-way controller (4)
Reverses a frame (when paused).
Fast-reverses playback.
Press and hold four-way
controller (4)
Rear e-dial (S)
Adjusts the volume (6 levels).
M button
Confirms/cancels a dividing point.
Proceed to Step 8 if you do not want to delete any segment.
5
Press the U/i button.
The screen to select the segment(s) to delete is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138
6
Use the four-way controller (45)
to move the selection frame, and
press the 4 button.
00'05"
10'00"
The segment(s) to delete are specified.
Multiple segments can be deleted at
once.
Select segments for deletion
OK
MENU
Press the 4 button again to cancel the
selection.
7
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed in Step 4 appears again.
4
8
9
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as], and press the
4 button.
Saves divided movie
as separate files
The movie is divided at the specified
points and the unwanted segments are
deleted from it. The divided movie is then
saved as separate files and the single
image display reappears.
Save as
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
• Select dividing points in chronological order from the beginning of the movie.
When canceling the selected dividing points, cancel each of them in reverse
order (from the end of the movie to the beginning). In an order other than
specified, you can neither select frames as a dividing point nor cancel the
selections of the dividing points. You cannot, for example, select the frames
prior to the last selected frame as a dividing point while selecting a dividing
point.
• Movies with a short recording time cannot be divided.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Shooting Settings
This chapter describes image file formats and camera
operating settings in capture mode.
Setting a File Format ..........................................140
Setting the White Balance .................................143
Correcting Images ..............................................148
Setting the Image Finishing Tone .....................155
Customizing the Button/E-dial Functions ........162
Saving Frequently Used Settings .....................168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140
Setting a File Format
Set the file format, number of recorded pixels, quality level, and color
space of still pictures.
1
Select [Image Capture Settings] in the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu, and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Image Capture Settings] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [File Format], [JPEG
Recorded Pixels], [JPEG Quality]
Image Capture Settings
File Foormat
JPEG Recordded Piixels
JPEG Quuality
or [Color Space], and press the
Color Space
four-way controller (5).
5
Refer to p.141 to p.142 for details about
each of these settings.
MENU
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to change the settings,
and press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears
again.
• File Format, JPEG Recorded Pixels and JPEG Quality can also be set
through the control panel.
• When File Format, JPEG Recorded Pixels or JPEG Quality is changed, the
number of still pictures that can be recorded for that setting appears on the
monitor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
141
File Format
You can set the format of image files.
Captures images in JPEG format. (default setting)
JPEG You can change the [JPEG Recorded Pixels] and [JPEG Quality]
settings.
Captures images in CMOS sensor output format without processing.
RAW files are recorded with the general-purpose DNG (Digital
Negative) format designed by Adobe Systems.
Effects of White Balance, Custom Image and Color Space are not
applied to the captured images, but they are saved as actual original
RAW
information. When you perform the development process by using the
[RAW Development] function (p.196), you can create JPEG images
with these effects.
Captures images in both JPEG and RAW formats.
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the V/Y button, you
can press the button to temporarily change the file format and save an
RAW+
5
image in both file formats. (p.166)
• When Digital Filter or HDR Capture is set, the file format is fixed to [JPEG]
and cannot be changed. To change the file format, deactivate these
functions.
• In Z (Night Scene HDR) of H mode, images are saved in JPEG format,
regardless of the [File Format] setting.
JPEG Recorded Pixels
Sets the recording size of images when the file format is set to [JPEG].
Recorded Pixels
Pixels
4928×3264 (default setting)
4224×2816
p
E
a
f
3456×2304
2688×1792
• The more pixels there are, the bigger the file size. The file size will also vary
according to the [JPEG Quality] setting.
• The quality of a captured image depends on the shooting settings, resolution
of the printer and a variety of other factors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142
JPEG Quality
You can set the image quality level (compression ratio). The default setting
is C (Best).
C Best
Quality: clearer File size: larger
Quality: grainier File size: smaller
D
E
Better
Good
Color Space
You can select a color space to use.
Mainly used for devices such as a computer. (default setting)
sRGB
5
Covers a wider range of color than sRGB and is used for
commercial uses such as industrial printing.
AdobeRGB
The file naming system changes depending on the color space setting as
shown below. (“xxxx” is a four-digit sequential number.)
For sRGB: IMGPxxxx.JPG
For AdobeRGB: _IMGxxxx.JPG
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
143
Setting the White Balance
Adjusts the color of an image based on ambient light conditions so that
white objects appear white.
Color
Item
Setting
Temperature *1
(default setting) 8,000K
Auto
F
Daylight
For use when taking pictures in sunlight. Approx. 5,200K
G
For use when taking pictures in the
shade. It reduces the bluish color tones in Approx. 8,000K
a picture.
Shade
Cloudy
H
For use when taking pictures on cloudy
Approx. 6,000K
days.
^
For use when taking pictures under
fluorescent lighting. Select the type of
fluorescent light.
5
Fluorescent
Light
D
N
W
L
Fluorescent - Daylight Color Approx. 6,500K
Fluorescent - Daylight White Approx. 5,000K
Fluorescent - Cool White
Fluorescent - Warm White
J
Approx. 4,200K
Approx. 3,000K
For use when taking pictures under light
bulbs or other tungsten light. It reduces
the reddish color tones in a picture.
Tungsten
Approx. 2,850K
I
For use when taking pictures using the
built-in flash.
Flash
Approx. 5,400K
—
L
Use this to keep and strengthen the color
tone of the light source in the image.
*2
f
Use this to manually adjust the white
balance according to the lighting when
taking pictures. Up to three settings can
be saved.
Manual 1-3
Color
—
—
K
Use this to set the color temperature
Temperature value.
K
*1 The color temperatures (K) shown above are all estimates. These do not indicate precise
colors.
*2 CTE = Color Temperature Enhancement
The white balance is fixed to F in n and H modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in standby mode.
The White Balance setting screen appears.
The last image taken is displayed in the background.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select the white balance.
Auto Whitee Balance
When J is selected, press the four-way
controller (3) and use the four-way
controller (45) to select D, N, W, or L.
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not need to
change the parameters.
Check
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
INFO
WB
Available operations
V/Y button Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image with
the white balance effect applied (only when shooting with
the viewfinder).
5
m button
Saves the background image (only when the data is
available).
M button
Displays the fine-tuning screen.
3
4
Press the M button.
The fine-tuning screen appears.
Fine-tune the white balance.
G3
A2
Check
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
0
Available operations
Four-way controller Adjusts the tone of the colors between green (G) and
(23) magenta (M).
Four-way controller Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B) and
(45)
amber (A).
d button
Resets the adjustment value to the default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
145
5
6
Press the 4 button.
The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
To set the white balance for when the flash discharges, select [Auto White
Balance], [Unchanged] or [Flash] in [9. WB When Using Flash] of the [A
Custom Setting 2] menu.
Adjusting the White Balance Manually
You can adjust the white balance depending on the light source when
taking pictures.
5
1
Select K in Step 2 on p.144, and press the four-way
controller (3).
2
Use the four-way controller (45
)
Manual Whitee Balance
to select 1 to 3.
K
K
SHUTTER
Adjust
Check
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
INFO
WB
3
4
Under the light you wish to measure the white balance of,
select a white area as the subject.
Or, fully display a white sheet of paper in the center of the viewfinder or
monitor.
Press the shutter release button fully.
Set the focus mode to \ when the shutter cannot be released.
The screen to select the measuring range is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
5
6
Use the four-way controller (2345) to move the frame
to the position you want to measure.
Press the 4 button.
The white balance is measured, and the screen that was displayed in
Step 2 appears again.
Adjust the white balance as necessary.
The message [The operation could not be completed correctly] appears
when measuring is unsuccessful. Press the 4 button to remeasure the
white balance.
7
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
If a picture is extremely overexposed or underexposed, the white balance may
not be adjusted. In this case, adjust exposure to the correct exposure before
adjusting the white balance.
5
Saving the White Balance Settings of a Captured Image
You can copy the white balance settings of a captured image and save it
as Manual White Balance.
Only the white balance settings of still pictures taken with this camera can be
copied. However, the following images cannot be selected.
• Multi-exposure image
• Index image
• Still pictures captured from a movie
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in the single image
display of playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select K (Save
as Manual WB), and press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Turn the front e-dial (R) to select an image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
147
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a number, and press the
4 button.
100-0001
Saves this image's White
Balance settings as a custom
selection
The white balance settings of the selected
image are saved as Manual White
Balance and the camera is ready to take a
Save as Maanual 1
Save as Manual 2
Save as Maanual 3
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
picture. The white balance setting is
K.
Adjusting the White Balance with Color
Temperature
Use to set the color temperature value.
5
1
Select K in Step 2 on p.144, and press the M button.
2
Adjust the color temperature with
the front or rear e-dial.
You can set the color temperature value
within the range from 2500K to 10000K.
10000K
G3
A2
Check
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
0
Color temperature steps vary depending on the e-dial.
E-dial
Kelvin
1 Step (100K)
Mired *1
Front (R)
Rear (S)
1 Step (20M)
5 Steps (100M)
10 Steps (1,000K)
*1 The default setting for Color Temperature step units is [Kelvin]. You can change the
step units to [Mired] in [11. Color Temperature Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 2]
menu. However, figures are converted to and displayed in Kelvin.
3
4
Press the 4 button.
The White Balance setting screen reappears.
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148
Correcting Images
The camera and lens properties can be automatically modified for when
taking pictures.
Brightness Adjustment
Expands the dynamic range and enables a wider range of tones
expression by the CMOS sensor and reduces the occurrence of
overexposed and underexposed areas.
1
Press the M button in standby mode.
The control panel appears.
5
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Highlight
Correction] or [Shadow Correction], and press the
4
button.
The [Highlight Correction] or [Shadow Correction] screen appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to change the settings.
Highligght Coorrection
Auto
For Highlight Correction, select from
[Auto] (default setting), [On] or [Off].
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
For Shadow Correction, select from
[Auto] (default setting), [Low], [Medium],
[High] or [Off].
Shadow Corrrection
Auto
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
149
When the sensitivity is set to less than ISO 200 setting, [Highlight Correction]
cannot be set to [On].
You can also set [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] in [D-Range
Settings] of the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu.
High Dynamic Range Image Capture
High dynamic range photography is a way of expressing the entire range
from dark to bright areas by capturing multiple images with different
exposures (underexposed, properly exposed (standard), and
overexposed), and combining them into a single image.
Available by setting through the control panel or in the
[A Rec. Mode 1] menu.
HDR Capture
Z (Night Scene HDR) Available by selecting from H mode. (p.84)
5
This section explains how to set [HDR Capture].
• HDR Capture is not available in the following situations.
• when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+]
• when p mode is set
• During HDR Capture or in Z (Night Scene HDR) mode, the following
functions are not available.
- Continuous Shooting
- Flash discharge
- Digital Filter
- Exposure Bracketing
- Multi-exposure
• If Z (Night Scene HDR) is selected, settings for this mode override the
settings for HDR Capture.
•
During HDR Capture or in
Z
(Night Scene HDR) mode, multiple images are
combined together to create a single image, so it will take time to save an image.
1
Select [HDR Capture] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu, and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [HDR Capture] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150
2
3
Press the four-way controller
(5), use the four-way controller
(23) to select a setting, and
press the 4 button.
HDR Capture
HDR Capture
Auto Align
Exposure Bracket Value
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto Align],
and use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Uses Auto Align. Activates Shake Reduction according to the [Shake
Reduction] setting. (default setting)
O
P
Does not use Auto Align. Deactivates Shake Reduction.
5
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Exposure
Bracket Value], and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to set the range in which
to change the exposure, and press the 4 button.
Select from ±1 EV, ±2 EV (default setting) or ±3 EV.
6
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a series of pictures.
• The procedure of Step 2 can also be performed through the control panel.
• When both Shake Reduction and Auto Align are activated, take note of the
following points.
•
Make sure to hold the camera firmly so that the composition of the picture does
not change while the three images are captured. If there is a great difference
of the composition between three images, Auto Align may not be possible.
• Images captured with HDR Capture are susceptible to camera shake and
blur. Be sure to set a higher shutter speed and a higher ISO sensitivity.
• When the sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO], the sensitivity can be raised
more easily than normal.
• Auto Align may not be possible when lenses that have a focal length
exceeding 100 mm are used, or when the entire subject is checkered or
has a uniform surface.
• In Z (Night Scene HDR) mode, [HDR Capture] is fixed to [Auto] and the
Auto Align function is enabled.
•
If [One Push File Format] is assigned to the
V
/Y
button, pressing the button
temporarily deactivates HDR Capture and saves captured images in RAW+.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
151
Lens Correction
Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic aberrations occurring due to
lens properties.
Distortion
Distortion is a phenomenon in which the center of the image appears
inflated (barrel distortion) or the center of the image appears pinched
(pincushion distortion). Distortion occurs more easily when using a
zoom lens or a small diameter lens, and straight walls or the horizon in
an image appear curved.
5
Pincushion distortion
Barrel distortion
Lateral chromatic aberration
Lateral chromatic aberration is a phenomenon in which the
magnification of an image varies according to the colors (wavelengths
of light) when a picture was taken, and may cause a blurred image.
Chromatic aberration occurs more easily at shorter focal lengths.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
• Corrections can only be made when using DA, DA L, D FA or some FA
lenses. The Lens Correction functions cannot be selected when an
incompatible lens is attached. (p.259)
• The Lens Correction functions are disabled when using an accessory such
as a close-up ring or rear converter that is attached between the camera and
the lens.
• The shooting speed for Continuous Shooting may be slower when using the
Distortion Correction function.
• The effects of the Lens Correction functions may be barely noticeable in
some cases due to the shooting conditions or other factors.
1
Press the M button in standby mode.
The control panel appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Distortion
Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj], and press the 4
button.
5
The [Distortion Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] screen appears.
3
4
to select [Off] or [On].
Distortion Coorrecction
On
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
• When a compatible lens is attached and the file format is set to [RAW] or
[RAW+], the correction information is saved as a RAW file parameter and you
can select [On] or [Off] when developing the RAW images. (p.197)
• You can also set [Distortion Correction] and [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] in [Lens
Correction] of the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
153
Composition Adjustment
It allows you to adjust the composition of your image using the Shake
Reduction mechanism. Use this when you want to adjust the composition,
such as when using a tripod.
1
Select [Composition Adjust.] in the [A Rec. Mode 3]
menu, and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Composition Adjust.] screen appears.
2
Select [Start adjustment], and
press the 4 button.
Compositionn Adjust.
Start adjustment
Recall Previous Position
To start adjusting the composition from
the previous position, set [Recall
5
Please note: depending on the
Previous Position] to O.
lens, adjuusting tthhe compoosition
may cause vignetting
Live View is displayed and the
composition can be adjusted.
OK OK
MENU
3
Adjust the composition.
0
0
0
The amount of adjustment (the number of
steps) is displayed at the top right of the
screen.
Adjust thhe comppositiion of
the image
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Available operations
Four-way controller
Moves the composition up, down, left or right.
(2345)
Adjust up to 16 steps (approximately ±1.0 mm) on
the image sensor.
Rear e-dial (S)
Adjusts the level of the composition.
Up to 8 steps (approximately ±1°) can be adjusted.
| button
Resets the adjustment value to the default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to normal Live View and is ready to take a picture.
• [Shake Reduction] is not available.
• The adjustment value is reset when Live View is ended.
• If you use the Composition Adjustment function frequently, you can assign
the function to the |/Y button. (p.165)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
155
Setting the Image Finishing Tone
Take pictures with settings to suit for your creative photographic vision.
Custom Image
Select the desired picture style from the following modes and enjoy taking
pictures with a creative finishing tone.
Image Tone
Bright
Image
Saturation, hue and contrast are set relatively high to create a
bright sharp image. (default setting)
Natural
Portrait
Creates a natural look that is close to the actual color.
Reproduces a healthy and bright skin tone.
5
Increases color saturation, highlights shapes, and produces a
vivid color image.
Landscape
Vibrant
Radiant
Muted
Changes the color slightly to create an antique look.
Emphasizes glossiness to produce a spectacular finish.
Reduces the saturation to create a soft look.
Reduces the saturation and increases the contrast to create
the look of an old picture.
Bleach Bypass
Creates a picture with strong image contrast as if taken with
reversal film.
Reversal Film
Monochrome
Takes pictures using a monochrome color filter.
Cross
Processing
Intentionally changes the hue and contrast. The outcome
varies each time a picture is taken.
The image tone is automatically set according to the capture mode and the
setting cannot be changed in n and H modes.
1
Press the M button in standby mode.
The control panel appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Custom
Image], and press the 4 button.
The Custom Image setting screen appears.
The last image taken is displayed in the background.
Use the four-way controller
Bright
(2345) to select an image
finishing tone.
You can check the selected Custom
Image effect with the background image.
Proceed to Step 8 if you do not need to
change the parameters.
Parameter Adj.
INFO
MENU
Cancel
Check
OK OK
Available operations
m button
Saves the background image (only when the data is
available).
5
M button
Displays the screen to adjust the parameters.
V/Y button Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image
with the Custom Image effect applied (only when shooting
with the viewfinder).
4
5
Press the M button.
The screen to adjust the parameters appears.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to choose the parameter you
want to change.
Saturation
Cancel
Check
OK OK
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
157
The following parameters can be changed according to the selected
image finishing tone.
Image Tone
Parameter
Saturation: -4 to +4
Hue: -4 to +4
Bright/
Natural/
Portrait/
Landscape/
Vibrant/
Radiant
High/Low Key Adj: -4 to +4
Contrast: -4 to +4
Sharpness: -4 to +4
Saturation: -4 to +4
Toning: Off/Green/Yellow/Orange/Red/Magenta/Purple/Blue/Cyan
High/Low Key Adj: -4 to +4
Contrast: -4 to +4
Muted/
Bleach
Bypass
Sharpness: -4 to +4
Reversal Film Sharpness: -4 to +4
Filter Effect: None/Green/Yellow/Orange/Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Infrared Filter
5
Toning: Off/Green/Yellow/Orange/Red/Magenta/Purple/Blue/Cyan
High/Low Key Adj: -4 to +4
Monochrome
Contrast: -4 to +4
Sharpness: -4 to +4
Cross
Processing
*1
Random/Preset 1-3/Favorite 1-3
*1 For [Favorite 1-3], you can save the settings of a cross processed image as a
favorite in advance through the playback mode palette. (p.158)
6
Use the four-way controller (45) to adjust the
parameter’s value.
You can check the saturation and hue with the radar chart.
Available operations
Rear e-dial (S)
Switches between [Sharpness] and [Fine Sharpness].
Resets the adjustment value to the default setting.
d button
7
Press the 4 button.
The screen that was displayed in Step 3 appears again.
8
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158
You can also change the settings from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.
Saving the Cross Processing Settings of a Captured
Image
The outcome of cross processing varies each time a picture is taken. If a
cross processed image that you like comes out, you can save the Cross
Processing settings used in that image. A total of three Cross Processing
settings can be saved.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in the single image
display of playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
5
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select s (Save
Cross Processing), and press the 4 button.
The camera will search for cross processed images starting from the
most recent image taken. (An hourglass icon is displayed while
searching.) When a cross processed image is found, the screen to save
the settings appears.
If there are no cross processed images, the message [No cross
processed image] appears.
3
4
Turn the front e-dial (R) to
select a cross processed image.
100-0001
Saves this image's Cross
Processing settings
Save as Favorite 1
Save as Favorite 2
Save as Favorite 3
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Use the four-way controller (23) to select a number, and
press the 4 button.
The settings of the selected image are saved to [Favorite 1 - 3] and the
selected image appears in the single image display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
159
Digital Filter
You can apply a filter effect when taking pictures.
The following filters can be selected.
Filter Name
Effect
Parameter
Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/Blue/
Cyan/Green/Yellow
For extracting one or
two specific colors
Extract Color and making the rest of
the image black and
white.
Extractable Range of Color 1: 1 to 5
Extracted Color 2: Off/Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow
Extractable Range of Color 2: 1 to 5
Shading Level: Off/Low/Medium/High
For taking pictures
Toy Camera that look as if taken
with a toy camera.
(Not available in
C
mode.)
Blur: Low/Medium/High
5
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow
Toning (B-A): 7 levels
For taking pictures
Retro
with the look of old
photos.
Frame Composite: None/Thin/Medium/
Thick (Not available in C mode.)
For taking pictures
with high contrasts.
High Contrast
Shading *1
Intensity: 1 to 5
For taking pictures
with the edge areas
darkened.
Shading Type: 4 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Inverts the colors in
the image.
Invert Color
Off/On
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/
Yellow
For taking pictures
with the selected color
filter.
Color
Color Density: Light/Medium/Dark
*1 Cannot be selected in C mode.
• Digital Filter is not available in the following situations.
• when Z (Night Scene HDR) of H mode is set
• when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+]
• When Digital Filter is set, the following functions are not available.
• Continuous Shooting
• HDR Capture
• Multi-exposure
• Depending on the filter used, it may take longer to save images.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160
1
Press the M button in standby mode.
The control panel appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Digital
Filter], and press the 4 button.
The Digital Filter setting screen appears.
The last image taken is displayed in the background.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select a filter.
Toy Camera
You can check the selected filter effect
with the background image.
Proceed to Step 7 if you do not need to
change the parameters.
Parameter Adj.
INFO
MENU
Cancel
Check
OK OK
5
Available operations
M button
Displays the screen to adjust the parameters.
m button
Saves the background image (only when the data is
available).
V/Y button Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image
with the filter effect applied (only when shooting with the
viewfinder).
4
5
Press the M button.
The screen to adjust the parameters appears.
Use the four-way controller (23)
Shadingg Level
to select a parameter, and use
the four-way controller (45) to
adjust the value.
Press the d button to reset the
adjustment value to the default setting.
Cancel
Check
OK OK
MENU
6
Press the 4 button.
The screen that was displayed in Step 3 appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
161
7
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
• You can also change the settings from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.
• Select [No Filter] in Step 3 to finish shooting with a digital filter.
• After shooting, you can also apply digital filter effects to JPEG/RAW images
in playback mode. (p.189)
• [Shading Level] for the Toy Camera filter and the Shading filter cannot be
checked with Live View.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162
Customizing the Button/E-dial
Functions
Functions can be assigned to the front/rear e-dial, V/Y button, and
=/L button.
The current functions assigned to the
buttons/dials can be checked with guide
display.
Program
Automatic Exposure
Setting the E-dials Operation
5
For each exposure mode, you can select the parameters for when the front
and rear e-dials are turned and | button is pressed.
1
Select [E-Dial Programming] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu,
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [E-Dial Programming 1] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select an exposure
E-Dial Programming
1 2
mode.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the
[E-Dial Programming 2] screen.
MENU
3
Press the four-way controller (5).
The screen for the selected exposure mode appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
163
4
Press the four-way controller
(5), and use the four-way
controller (23) to select the
desired setting.
Exposure Mode
The following settings can be selected for
each exposure mode.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Exposure
Mode
Front E-dial
(R)
Rear E-dial
(S)
| Button
b
c
c
b
}e
(default setting)
}e
m
eSHIFT
m
eLINE
e
eSHIFT
–
eLINE
–
–
5
–
o
–
–
(default setting)
(default setting)
(default setting)
o
eSHIFT
o
m
–
o
eSHIFT
o
m
eLINE
K
eLINE
–
o
b
–
–
–
–
b
–
b
m
–
b
c
m
b
–
b
o
b
o AUTO
o
–
o AUTO
c
–
c
–
–
m
c
–
c
m
–
o
c
c
o AUTO
o AUTO
o
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164
Exposure
Mode
Front E-dial
(R)
Rear E-dial
(S)
| Button
b
c
c
b
(default setting)
(default setting)
eLINE
L
/a
bSHIFT
cSHIFT
–
–
–
–
–
–
c
–
(default setting)
c
o
c
p
c
o
Depends on the [Exposure Setting] (p.129) of the
[C Movie 1] menu.
C
m: Adjust EV compensation value }e: Return to e eLINE: Program line
eSHIFT: Program shift –: Not available
5
5
6
Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.
Repeat Steps 2 to 6 to change the settings of other exposure modes.
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
165
Setting the V/Y Button Operation
You can assign one of the following functions to the V/Y button.
Temporarily changes the file format. Simultaneously saves
an image in both JPEG and RAW formats, regardless of the
One Push File
[File Format] setting. You can set whether or not to apply the
Format
setting to only one image, and select the file format when the
V
/
Y
button is pressed. (p.166) (default setting)
Takes multiple pictures with different exposure settings.
(p.93)
Exposure Bracketing
Optical Preview
While the
V/Y
button is pressed, you can check the depth
of field by stopping down the aperture to the set value. (p.114)
Displays the Digital Preview. (p.115)
Digital Preview
Sets whether to save or magnify the preview image, and
whether to display the histogram and bright/dark area warning.
Composition Adjust. Adjusts the composition. (p.153)
Enables or disables changing the AF point when the focus
point selection mode is set to [Select]. (p.105)
5
AF Active Area
1
Select [Button Customization] in the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu, and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Button Customization] screen appears.
2
Select
way controller (5).
, and press the four-
Button CCustoomization
One Push Filee Format
The screen to select a function of the
V/Y button appears.
Enable AF1
Enable AF1
MENU
3
Press the four-way controller
(5), use the four-way controller
(23) to select a function, and
press the 4 button.
Button CCustoomization
One Push Fille Format
Exposure Bracketing
Optical Prreview
Digital Prreview
Compoositiioon Adjust.
AF Active Area
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166
4
Press the 3 button three times.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.
Setting the One Push File Format
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the V/Y button, specify
the function settings.
1
Select [One Push File Format] in Step 3 on p.165.
2
shot], and use the four-way controller (45) to select O or
P.
5
The recording format returns to the original file format after a picture
is taken. (default setting)
O
The setting is canceled when any of the following operations are
performed.
• the V/Y button is pressed again
• the Q button or 3 button is pressed
• the mode dial is turned
P
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a file format.
The left side is the [File Format] (p.141) setting and the right side is the
file format when the V/Y button is pressed.
Press the four-way controller
Button CCustoomization
(5), use the four-way controller
One Push Fille Format
(23) to select a file format, and
Cancel after 1 shot
press the 4 button.
MENU
5
Press the 3 button three times.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears
again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
167
Setting the =/L Button Operation
You can assign one of the following functions to the =/L button.
Separate settings can be made for still picture shooting and movie
recording.
Both the =/L button and shutter release button are
Enable AF1
available to perform autofocus. (p.101) (default setting)
Autofocus is performed only when the
and not when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.
=
/
L
button is pressed
Enable AF2
Cancel AF
AE Lock
While the =/L button is pressed, autofocus is not performed
even when the shutter release button is pressed. Take your finger
off the =/L button to return to normal autofocus operation.
The exposure setting is locked when the =/L button is
pressed. (p.96)
5
1
menu, and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Button Customization] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select
the four-way controller (5).
, and press
The screen to select a function of the =/L button appears.
3
4
Press the four-way controller
(5), use the four-way controller
(23) to select a function, and
press the 4 button.
Button CCustoomization
Enable AF1
Enable AF2
Cancel AF
AE Lock
AF is peerforrmmed wheen the
AF/AE-L bbuttonn is prreessed
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Press the 3 button three times.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168
Saving Frequently Used Settings
You can save the current camera settings in A mode and easily retrieve
them.
The following settings can be saved.
• Capture mode (e/K/b/c/L/a/p)
• Sensitivity
• Color Space
• AE Metering
• White Balance
• AF.A
• Flash Mode/Flash Exposure
Compensation
• AF point
• Lens Correction
• D-Range Settings
• High-ISO NR
• Drive Mode
• Exposure Bracketing
• Exposure Compensation Value
• Digital Filter
• Slow Shutter Speed NR
• Shake Reduction
• E-Dial Programming
• Button Customization
5
• Custom Image
• HDR Capture
• File Format
• [A Custom Setting 1-3]
menu settings
• JPEG Recorded Pixels
• JPEG Quality
The A mode cannot be set when the mode dial is set to n, H or C.
Saving the Settings
You can save the settings as USER1 or USER2 mode and use them by
setting the mode dial to B or C.
1
Select a capture mode, and make the necessary settings.
2
Select [Save USER Mode] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu,
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Save USER Mode] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
169
3
4
5
Press the four-way controller
(5).
Save USER Mode
Save USER Mode
Rename USER Mode
Check Saved Settings
Reset USER Mode
MENU
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [USER1] or
[USER2], and press the four-way
controller (5).
Save USER Mode
USER1
USER2
MENU
5
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Save], and press the
4 button.
Save USER Mode
Saves currrent ssettinngs in
USER1 custtom mode
The settings are saved and the screen
that was displayed in Step 3 appears
again.
Save
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Editing a Setting Name
You can change the name of the A mode in which you saved settings.
1
Select [Rename USER Mode] in Step 3 of “Saving the
Settings”, and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Rename USER Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [USER1] or
[USER2], and press the four-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170
3
Enter the text.
Rename USER Mode
Textselection
cursor
Up to 18 single-byte
alphanumeric
characters and
symbols can be
entered.
Finish
Text input cursor
Delete One Chharacter
Cancel
OK Enter
MENU
Available operations
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the text selection cursor.
Moves the text input cursor.
Rear e-dial (S)
m button
Switches between upper and lower case letters.
4 button
Enters a character selected with the text selection
cursor at the position of the text input cursor.
5
U/i button
Deletes a character at the position of the text input
cursor.
4
After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to
[Finish], and press the 4 button.
The name is changed and the camera returns to the [Rename USER
Mode] screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
171
Checking the Saved USER Settings
1
Select [Check Saved Settings] in Step 3 of p.169, and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Check Saved Settings] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [USER1] or
[USER2], and press the four-way controller (5).
The current settings saved as A mode
are displayed.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2.0
Use the four-way controller (23) to
switch between pages.
200-800
G1 A1
1
EV
0.0
0.0
5
OK OK
MENU
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Save USER Mode] screen.
Using Saved USER Settings
You can easily retrieve saved settings.
1
Set the mode dial to B or C.
The A mode guide appears for 30
seconds and the saved settings are
retrieved.
Use the four-way controller (23) to
check the saved settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172
2
3
Change the settings as necessary.
The capture mode can be changed in
[Exposure Mode] of the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu.
1 2 3 4
Exposurre Mode
Custom Image
Digitall Filter
This screen appears only when the mode
dial is set to B or C.
HDR Capture
Image Capturre Settings
AE Meteering
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Take a picture.
The settings changed in Step 2 are not saved as A mode settings. When
the camera is turned off, the camera returns to the originally saved settings. To
change the original settings, save the A mode settings again.
5
Resetting to Default Settings
Resets the settings saved as A mode to the default settings.
1
Select [Reset USER Mode] in Step 3 on p.169, and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Reset USER Mode] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [USER1] or
[USER2], and press the four-way controller (5).
Press the four-way controller (2)
Reset USER Mode
to select [Reset], and press the
4 button.
Resets USER1 ccustoomm mode
to defauult settttings annd name
The A mode settings return to the
default values and the screen that was
displayed before selecting the menu item
appears again.
Reset
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Playback Functions and
Image Editing
This chapter describes how to use the various playback
functions and how to edit the captured images.
How to Operate the Playback/Edit
Functions ............................................................174
Setting the Playback Display Method ..............176
Selecting the Playback Functions ....................177
Deleting Multiple Images ...................................184
Processing Images ............................................187
Developing RAW Images ...................................196
Connecting the Camera to an AV Device .........200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174
How to Operate the Playback/Edit
Functions
Make settings related to playing back and editing images in the playback
mode palette or [Q Playback] menu.
For details on how to use the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.39).
Playback Mode Palette Items
Press the four-way controller (3) in the
Image Rotation
single image display to call up the playback
mode palette.
You can also display the playback mode
palette when a movie is paused.
Rotates ccapturred immaages.
Useful forr imagee playbback on
TV and otther dissplay deevices
Exit
MENU
OK OK
6
Item
Function
Page
Image Rotation *1
Changes the rotation information of an image. p.183
s
Modifies an image with various filter effects
which, for example, change the color tone of
p.189
Digital Filter *1
Resize*1 *2
D
an image and produce a soft or slim
appearance.
Changes the number of recorded pixels or
size of an image, and saves it as a new
image.
p.187
n
Crops out only the desired area of the
picture and saves it as a new image.
Cropping *1
Index *1
p.188
p.194
p.220
o
Joins a number of images together and
creates a new image with them.
p
Z
Protects images from being accidentally
erased.
Protect
Sets the number of prints and whether to
print the date on the images saved on the
SD Memory Card.
DPOF *1 *2
Slideshow
p.229
p.182
r
Plays back the images one after another.
u
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
175
Item
Function
Page
p.146
Saves the white balance settings of a
captured image as Manual White Balance.
*1
K
Save as Manual WB
Saves the settings for an image captured in
Cross Processing mode of Custom Image to p.158
Favorite.
Save Cross
Processing
s
Converts a RAW image to JPEG format and
p.196
RAWDevelopment*1
Movie Edit *3
h
[
saves it as a new image.
p.137
segments.
Eye-Fi Image
Transfer *4
Transfers selected images wirelessly using
p.227
N
an optional Eye-Fi card.
*1 This cannot be performed when a movie is displayed.
*2 This cannot be performed when a RAW image is displayed.
*3 This can be performed only when a movie is displayed.
*4 This can be performed only when [Eye-Fi Communication] is set to [SELECT] in [Eye-Fi]
of the [R Set-up 2] menu.
Playback Menu Items
6
The following items are available in the [Q Playback] menu.
Press the 3 button in playback mode to display the [Q Playback 1]
menu.
Menu
Item
Slideshow
Page
p.181
Plays back images one after another. You
can set how images will be displayed in
the slideshow.
Sets the initial magnification when
magnifying images.
Quick Zoom
Q1
p.176
p.186
Sets whether to display the bright/dark
area warning during playback.
Bright/Dark Area
Delete All Images
Deletes all saved images at once.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176
Setting the Playback Display Method
You can set the initial magnification when magnifying images, and whether
to display the Bright/Dark Area warning in playback mode.
1
Select [Quick Zoom] in the [Q Playback 1] menu, and
press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the magnification, and
press the 4 button.
1
Slideshow
Quickk Zoom
Bright/Daark Area
Delete Alll Images
Select from [×16], [×8], [×4], [×2] or [Off]
(default setting).
Off
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Bright/Dark
Area], and use the four-way controller (45) to select O or
P.
6
When set to O, bright portions blink red and dark portions blink yellow.
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears
again.
The bright/dark area warning is not displayed in Detailed Information Display
and RGB Histogram Display. (p.30)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
177
Selecting the Playback Functions
You can display images in a list or play back saved images successively.
Magnifying Images
Images can be magnified up to 16 times in playback mode.
1
Select an image in the single image display.
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the
right (toward y).
100-0001
The image is magnified with each click (1.2
to 16 times).
6
x4
Available operations
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y) Magnifies the image (up to 16 times).
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f) Reduces the image (up to 1 times).
Four-way controller (2345)
Changes the display area.
Front e-dial (R)
Retains the magnification and the
position of the display area and shows
the previous/next image.
d button
Returns the position of the display area
to the center (when the display area is
not at the center).
M button
Switches between [Standard Information
Display] and [No Information Display].
4 button
Returns to the single image display.
• The default setting for the first click is 1.2 times. You can change this in
[Quick Zoom] of the [Q Playback 1] menu. (p.176)
• The initial full display of vertical images is displayed with a magnification of
0.75 times that of horizontal images. Therefore, magnification at the first click
starts at 1 times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178
Displaying Multiple Images
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the left (toward f) in the
single image display.
The 9 thumbnail display screen appears
(default setting).
-
100 0010
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the left (toward f) again to
switch to the folder display.
Images are grouped and displayed by the
folder in which they are saved.
50
6
100
103
101
104
102
105
_
100 0202
3
4
Select the image(s) to display.
Available operations
Four-way controller
Moves the selection frame.
(2345)
U/i button
Deletes the selected images. (p.184)
4 button
Displays the selected image in the single
image display.
Displays the first image from the selected folder
in the single image display (in Folder Display).
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the right (toward y).
The camera returns to the single image display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
179
Changing the Multiple Image Display Style
You can change the number of images displayed at the same time, or
display the images by shooting date.
1
Press the M button in Step 1 on p.178.
The display style selection screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select the display
9 Thumbnaiil Dissplay
style.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
4/9/16/36/81 Thumbnail Display
Icons such as C and ? are displayed with
images (except in 81 Thumbnail Display).
6
-
100 0010
Calendar Filmstrip Display
Number of images shot on this date
Images are grouped and displayed by the
shooting date.
2/5
2013.5
THU
9
SAT 11
MON 20
24
2013.6
FRI
SUN
2
THU 13
TUE 25
107-0002
Shooting
date
Thumbnail
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180
Available operations
Four-way controller (23) Selects a shooting date.
Four-way controller (45) Selects an image taken on the selected
shooting date.
Rear e-dial (S) to the
right (y)
Displays the selected image in the single
image display.
Turn to the left (f) to return to the Calendar
Filmstrip Display.
3
Press the 4 button.
The selected display style is confirmed.
The next time the rear e-dial (S) is turned to the left (toward f) in the
single image display, the screen selected here will be displayed.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
181
Playing Back Images Continuously
You can play back all images saved on your SD Memory Card
successively in a slideshow.
Setting the Slideshow Display
Sets how images will be displayed during Slideshow.
1
Select [Slideshow] in the [Q Playback 1] menu, and press
the four-way controller (5).
The Slideshow setting screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select an item you want to
Slideshoow starts
ġ
Start
change.
Display Duration
Screen Effect
3sec.
6
The following items can be changed.
Repeat Playback
OK OK
MENU
Item
Display
Duration
Description
Setting
3sec. (default setting)/
5sec./10sec./30sec.
Select an image display duration.
Screen
Effect
Select a transition effect when the
next image is displayed.
OFF (default setting)/
Fade/Wipe/Stripe
Set whether to start the slideshow
again from the beginning after the
last image is displayed.
Repeat
Playback
P (default setting)/O
3
Press the four-way controller (5), use the four-way
controller (23) to change the setting, and press the 4
button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182
Starting the Slideshow
1
Select [Start] in Step 2 on p.181, and press the 4 button.
Or, select u (Slideshow) in the playback mode palette,
and press the 4 button.
The start screen is displayed and the
slideshow starts.
Start
Available operations
4 button
Pauses/resumes playback.
Displays the previous image.
Displays the next image.
Four-way controller (4)
Four-way controller (5)
6
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
Slideshow stops and the single image display reappears.
After slideshow ends, the camera returns to the single image display
even if you do not press the four-way controller (3).
For movies, only the first frame is displayed and then the next image is
displayed after the set display duration has elapsed. To play a movie during a
slideshow, press the 4 button while the first frame is displayed. After the
playback of the movie is finished, the slideshow will resume.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
183
Rotating Images
You can change the rotation information that is embedded in the Exif of an
image so the image can be displayed with the correct image orientation on
a TV or computer monitor.
• You cannot change the rotation information of an image in the following
conditions.
• when the image is protected
• when the image rotation information tag is not saved with the image
• Movie files cannot be rotated.
1
Select the image you want to rotate in the single image
display, and press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select s (Image
Rotation), and press the 4 button.
6
The selected image is rotated in 90° increments and the four thumbnail
images are displayed.
3
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select the desired
rotation direction, and press the
4 button.
The image rotation information is saved.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184
Deleting Multiple Images
You can delete multiple images at once. Be aware that deleted images
cannot be restored.
1Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) (p.220)
Deleting Selected Images
You can delete multiple images at once.
• Protected images cannot be selected.
• You can select up to 100 images at a time.
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the left (toward f) in the
single image display.
The 9 thumbnail display screen appears (default setting).
6
2
3
Press the U/i button.
The screen to select images to delete is displayed.
Select images to delete.
Delete
OK
MENU
Available operations
Four-way controller Moves the selection frame.
(2345)
4 button
Confirms/cancels the image selection.
Rear e-dial (S) Displays the selected image in the single image display
when turned to the right; returns to thumbnail display
when turned to the left.
Turn the front e-dial (R) to display the previous or
next image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
185
4
5
Press the U/i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Select &
Delete], and press the 4 button.
The selected images are deleted.
Deleting a Folder
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) two clicks to the left (toward f)
in the single image display.
The folder display screen appears.
2
3
Press the U/i button.
6
The delete confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Delete], and
press the 4 button.
The selected folder and all images in it are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when there are protected images. Use
the four-way controller (23) to select [Delete all] or [Leave all] and
press the 4 button. [Delete all] deletes all the images including the
protected images, while [Leave all] deletes only non-protected images.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186
Deleting All Images
You can delete all images saved on the SD Memory Card at once.
1
Select [Delete All Images] in the [Q Playback 1] menu,
and press the four-way controller (5).
The confirmation screen for deleting all images is displayed.
2
Press the four-way controller (2) to select [Delete All
Images], and press the 4 button.
All images are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when there are protected images. Use
the four-way controller (23) to select [Delete all] or [Leave all] and
press the 4 button.
[Delete all] deletes all the images including the protected images, while
[Leave all] deletes only non-protected images.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
187
Processing Images
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels
(Resize)
Changes the number of recorded pixels of a selected image, and saves it
as a new image.
• Only JPEG images captured with this camera can be resized.
• Images already resized to Z or S with this camera cannot be resized.
1
Select the image to resize in the single image display, and
press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select n
(Resize), and press the 4 button.
6
The screen to select the recorded pixels appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select the number of recorded
pixels, and press the 4 button.
You can select one of the image sizes
starting from one size smaller than that of
the original image.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as], and
press the 4 button.
The resized image is saved as a new image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping)
Crops out only the desired area of a selected image and saves it as a new image.
• Only JPEG images captured with this camera can be cropped.
• Images already resized to Z or S with this camera cannot be cropped.
1
Select the image to crop in the single image display, and
press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select o
(Cropping), and press the 4 button.
The cropping frame to specify the size and position of the area to crop
appears on the screen.
3
Specify the size and position of
the area to crop by using the
cropping frame.
6
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
INFO
Available operations
Four-way controller (2345)
Rear e-dial (S)
Moves the cropping frame.
Changes the size of the cropping frame.
M button
Changes the aspect ratio.
Four-way controller (2345) Rotates the image from -45° to +45°.
m button
Rotates the cropping frame in 90° increments
(only when the cropping frame can be rotated).
4
5
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as], and
press the 4 button.
The cropped image is saved as a new image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
189
Processing Images with Digital Filters
You can edit captured images using digital filters.
The following filters are available.
Filter Name
Effect
Parameter
Filter Effect: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/
Infrared Filter
Creates a monochrome
image.
Monochrome
Toning (B-A): 7 levels
Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow
Extracts one or two
specific colors and makes
the rest of the image black
and white.
Extractable Range of Color 1: 1 to 5
Extract Color
Extracted Color 2: OFF/Red/
Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow
Extractable Range of Color 2: 1 to 5
Shading Level: OFF/Low/Medium/
High
Creates an image that
Toy Camera looks as though it was
shot with a toy camera.
Blur: Low/Medium/High
6
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow
Toning (B-A): 7 levels
Creates an image with the
look of an old photo.
Retro
Frame Composite: None/Thin/
Medium/Thick
Enhances the contrast in
High Contrast
Intensity: 1 to 5
the image.
Shading Type: 4 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
OFF/ON
Creates an image with
Shading
darkened edges.
Invert Color
Color
Inverts image colors.
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/
Green/Yellow
Adds a color filter to the
image.
Color Density: Light/Medium/Dark
Tone
Expansion
Creates an image with a
unique contrast.
Low/Medium/High
Creates an image that
looks as though it was
drawn with a pencil.
Contrast: Low/Medium/High
Scratch Effect: OFF/ON
Sketch
Creates an image that
looks as though it was
painted.
Intensity: Low/Medium/High
Saturation: OFF/Low/Medium/High
Water Color
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190
Filter Name
Pastel
Effect
Parameter
Low/Medium/High
Creates an image that
looks as though it was
drawn with a crayon.
Lessens the tone of the
image to create an image
that looks as though it was
hand-drawn.
Posterization
Miniature
Intensity: 1 to 5
In-Focus Plane: -3 to +3
In-Focus Width: Narrow/Middle/
Wide
Blurs part of the image to
create a simulated
miniature scene.
In-Focus Plane Angle: Horizon/
Vertical/Positive Slope/Negative
Slope
Blur: Low/Medium/High
Creates an image with a
soft focus throughout the
image.
Soft Focus: Low/Medium/High
Soft
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON
Creates an image with a
special sparkling look by
adding extra glitter to the
highlights of night scenes
Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large
Size: Small/Medium/Large
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°
6
Starburst
Creates an image that
looks as though it was
shot with a fish-eye lens.
Fish-eye
Slim
Low/Medium/High
-8 to +8
Changes the horizontal
and vertical ratio of
images.
Brightness: -8 to +8
Saturation: -3 to +3
Hue: -3 to +3
Base
Parameter
Adj
Adjusts the parameters to
create the desired image.
Contrast: -3 to +3
Sharpness: -3 to +3
Only JPEG and RAW images captured with this camera can be edited with
digital filters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
191
1
Select an image for applying the digital filter in the single
image display, and press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select D (Digital
Filter), and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a filter appears.
Use the four-way controller
100-0001
(2345) to select a filter.
Monochhrome
You can check the selected filter effect
with the background image.
You can select a different image by
turning the front e-dial (R).
INFO Parameter Adj.
Stop
OK OK
MENU
Proceed to Step 7 if you do not need to
change the parameters.
6
4
5
Press the M button.
The screen to adjust the parameters appears.
Use the four-way controller (23)
100-0001
Red
to select a parameter and the
four-way controller (45) to
adjust the value.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
6
7
Press the 4 button.
The screen that was displayed in Step 3 appears again.
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192
8
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Apply additional
filter(s)] or [Save as], and press
the 4 button.
Continuue seleeccting fillters?
Apply additionnal filltter(s)
Save as
Select [Apply additional filter(s)] when
you want to apply additional filters to the
same image. The screen that was
displayed in Step 3 appears again.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
If [Save as] is selected, the filter-processed image is saved as a new image.
applied to the same image.
Recreating Filter Effects
Retrieves the filter effects of a selected image and applies the same filter
effects to other images.
6
1
Select a filter-processed image in the single image
display.
2
3
Select D (Digital Filter) in the playback mode palette, and
press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Recreating filter
effects], and press the 4
Applyinng the diigitall ffilter
button.
Recreating filter effects
The filter effects used for the selected
image appear.
Searching foor the orriginall image
OK OK
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
193
4
To check the parameter details,
press the M button.
100-0001
Reappliees followiing digittaal filter
effects frrom preeviouss image
You can check the filter parameters.
1.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Press the 3 button to return to the
previous screen.
2.
18.
3.
19.
4.
20.
Details
INFO
OK OK
MENU
5
6
Press the 4 button.
The image selection screen appears.
Turn the front e-dial (R) to
select the image to apply the
same filter effects, and press the
4 button.
100-0001
Performs digittal fiilter
proceessing too thiss iimage
You can only select the image that has
not been processed with a filter.
6
OK OK
MENU
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as], and
press the 4 button.
The filter-processed image is saved as a new image.
If [Searching for the original image] is selected in Step 3, the original image
prior to digital filter application can be retrieved. If the original image is no
longer stored on the SD Memory Card, the message [Original image, prior to
digital filter application, is not found] appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
Joining Multiple Images (Index)
Join a number of images together and display them as an index image.
You can have the camera select the images to include in the index image
or you can select them yourself. The images will be randomly arranged or
displayed by file number depending on the layout selected.
1
Press the four-way controller (
The playback mode palette appears.
3) in the single image display.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select p (Index),
and press the 4 button.
The Index setting screen appears.
3
Press the four-way controller
(5), use the four-way controller
(23) to select a layout, and
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
6
press the 4 button.
Selection
You can select o (Thumbnail),
p (Square), q (Random1),
Create an inddex image
Cancel
MENU
OK OK
r (Random2), s (Random3) or
p (Bubble).
Images are displayed according to the file number (from the smallest
number) for o, and are displayed in random order for other layouts.
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Images], and
press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the number of
images, and press the 4 button.
You can select 12, 24 or 36 images.
When the number of saved images is smaller than the number selected,
empty spaces will appear when [Layout] is set to o and some images
may be duplicated for other layouts.
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Backgrnd.],
and press the four-way controller (5).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
195
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the
background color, and press the 4 button.
You can select a white or black background.
8
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Selection],
and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select a type of image
selection, and press the 4 button.
Picks images automatically from all of the images
saved.
u
w
Auto
Lets you select images you want to include in the
index image. If w is selected, [Select image(s)]
appears and leads you to the image selection
screen.
Manual
Picks images automatically from the folder selected.
x
Folder name If x is selected, [Select a folder] appears and
6
leads you to the folder selection screen.
10 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Create an
index image], and press the 4 button.
The index image is created and a confirmation screen appears.
11 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save] or
[Reshuffle], and press the 4 button.
Save
Saves the index image as a P (3072×2048) and C file.
Reselects the images to be included in the index image and
Reshuffle displays a new index image. However, if o is selected for
[Layout], this item is not displayed.
After the index image is saved, the camera returns to playback mode and
the index image is displayed.
Processing may take a while when creating an index image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196
Developing RAW Images
You can convert captured RAW images into JPEG images, and save them
as new files.
Only RAW images captured with this camera can be edited. RAW images
captured with other cameras cannot be edited on this camera.
Developing One RAW Image
1
Select a RAW image in the single image display, and press
the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select h (RAW
Development), and press the 4 button.
6
The screen to select a development method is displayed.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Developing a single
image], and press the 4 button.
Developing a singgle image
The parameters saved in the image file
Developing multiiple immages
appear.
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not need to
change the parameters.
OK OK
MENU
If there are no images that can be
processed, [No image can be processed] appears.
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to choose the parameter you
100-0001
Image Capture Settings
want to change.
You can select a different image by
turning the front e-dial (R).
OK
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
197
The following parameters can be changed.
Parameter Value
Page
Aspect Ratio (K/J/I/L), JPEG
Image Capture Settings Recorded Pixels *1, JPEG Quality, Color p.141
Space
Distortion Correction/Lateral Chromatic
Aberration Adjustment (This can be
selected only for images taken with a
Lens Correction
p.151
Bright/Natural/Portrait/Landscape/
Vibrant/Radiant/Muted/Bleach Bypass/
Reversal Film/Monochrome/Cross
Processing
Custom Image
White Balance
p.155
p.143
F/G/H/^/JD/JN/JW/ JL/
I/L/f/K/K
Sensitivity
-2.0 to +2.0
—
High-ISO NR
Shadow Correction
p.98
p.148
6
*1 Select the JPEG recorded pixels corresponding to the aspect ratio.
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the value.
For Image Capture Settings and Lens Correction, press the four-way
controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23) to select an item.
For Custom Image and White Balance, press the four-way controller (5)
to display the setting screen.
6
7
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as], and
press the 4 button.
The RAW image is developed and saved as a new JPEG image.
8
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Continue] or
[Exit], and press the 4 button.
Select [Continue] to edit other images. The screen that was displayed in
Step 4 appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198
Developing Multiple RAW Images
You can develop multiple RAW images with the same settings.
1
Select [Developing multiple images] in Step 3 on p.196,
and press the 4 button.
Images are displayed in [4 Thumbnail Display], [9 Thumbnail Display],
[16 Thumbnail Display] or [36 Thumbnail Display] (the display style that
was selected last).
2
Select the RAW images to be developed.
Available operations
Four-way controller Moves the selection frame.
(2345)
4 button
Confirms/cancels the image selection.
Rear e-dial (S) Displays the selected image in the single image display.
Turn the front e-dial (R) to display the previous or
next image.
6
3
4
Press the M button.
The development confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Develop images as
shot] or [Develop images with
Develop images as shot
modified settings], and press the
4 button.
Develop imagges with
modified ssettings
To change parameters, select [Develop
images with modified settings].
OK OK
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
199
5
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to set [JPEG Recorded
Pixels] and [JPEG Quality].
JPEG Recorded Pixels
When [Develop images as shot] is selected
in Step 4, select
p
,
E
,
a
or
f
for
[JPEG Recorded Pixels].
OK
MENU
When [Develop images with modified
settings] is selected, refer to p.197 to
change other parameters. All images are developed with the same settings.
6
7
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as], and
press the 4 button.
The selected RAW images are developed and saved as new JPEG
images.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200
Connecting the Camera to an AV
Device
You can connect the camera to a TV or other device and play back
captured images.
• For an AV device with multiple video input terminals, check the operating
manual of the device, and select a suitable video input terminal for
connecting the camera.
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of the
optional AC adapter kit is recommended.
Connecting the Camera to a Video Input
Terminal
You can connect the camera to a device with a video input terminal.
Use the optional AV cable I-AVC7.
6
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.
2
Open the terminal cover of the camera, and connect the
AV cable to the VIDEO/PC output terminal.
3
Connect the other end of the cable to the input terminal on
the AV device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
201
4
Turn the AV device and camera on.
The camera turns on in video mode, and the camera information is
displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.
• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera while the camera is connected
to an AV device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.
• Movies are played back with monaural sound.
• Images are output at normal resolution regardless of the resolution supported
by the AV device. To output HD video, transfer to and play back on a
computer.
Setting the Video Output Format
When the hometown is set at the time of initial setting (p.58), the video
output format is set in accordance with that region. Depending on the
country or region, images may fail to be played back with the set video
output format. If this happens, change the setting.
6
1
Select [Interface Options] in the [R Set-up 2] menu, and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Interface Options] screen appears.
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Video Out],
and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [NTSC] or
[PAL], and press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.
The video output format differs depending on the region. When you set [Time
Setting] in the World Time setting (p.207) to X (Destination), the video output
setting changes to the video output format for that city. Refer to “List of World
Time Cities” (p.209) for cities that can be selected as a hometown or
destination.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Changing Additional
Settings
This chapter describes how to change additional settings.
How to Operate the Set-up Menu ......................204
Camera Settings .................................................206
File Management Settings .................................219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204
How to Operate the Set-up Menu
The [R Set-up] menu offers you general settings related to the camera.
For details on how to use the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.39).
Set-up Menu Items
The following items are available in the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.
Press the 3 button in capture/playback mode, and use the four-way
Menu
Item
Function
Page
p.58
Changes the language in which menus and
messages appear.
Language/u
Date Adjustment Sets the date format and time.
Sets the display of the local date and time of
p.60
World Time
the specified city so they can be displayed on p.207
the monitor in addition to the present location.
7
Sets the text size of an item selected on the
respective menu screens.
R1 Text Size
Sound Effects
p.59
Switches the operation sound on/off and
p.206
changes its volume.
Sets the guide display and display color of the
screen.
LCD Display
p.210
LCD Display
Settings
Adjusts the brightness and the color of the
monitor.
p.211
Flicker
Reduction
Cuts down on screen flicker by setting the
p.27
power frequency to that used in your region.
Sets the output format when connecting to an
p.201
Video Out
AV device with a video input terminal.
R2
USB
Connection
Sets the USB connection mode when
p.233
connecting to a computer.
Sets the naming system for folders to store
images.
Folder Name
p.221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
205
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Create New
Folder
Creates a new folder on the SD Memory Card. p.222
Sets the method used to assign file names for
images.
File Name
p.223
R2
Copyright
Information
Sets the photographer and copyright
p.224
information embedded in Exif.
Eye-Fi
Sets when using an Eye-Fi card.
p.226
p.214
automatically.
Auto Power Off
R3
Selects the type of AA batteries used for the
battery holder.
AA Battery Type
Reset
p.214
p.217
p.213
p.264
p.265
p.219
p.218
Resets all settings.
Maps out and corrects any defective pixels on
the CMOS sensor.
Pixel Mapping
Dust Removal
Cleans the CMOS sensor by shaking it.
Locks the mirror in the up position for cleaning
the CMOS sensor with a blower.
R4 Sensor Cleaning
Format
Formats an SD Memory Card.
Firmware Info/
Options
Displays the camera’s firmware version.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206
Camera Settings
Setting the Sound Effects, Date and Time, and
Display Language
Setting the Sound Effects
You can turn the camera operation sound on or off, or change its volume.
The sound for the following items can be set.
• In-focus
• AE-L (AE Lock operation sound)
• Self-timer
• Remote Control
• One Push File Format (operation sound when [One Push File Format]
is assigned to the V/Y button)
• Press OK for 1 sec. (operation sound when changing AF point is
enabled or disabled)
1
Select [Sound Effects] in the [R Set-up 1] menu, and
press the four-way controller (5).
7
The [Sound Effects 1] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to adjust the volume.
Select from six levels. When set to Z (0), you can turn all the sound
effects off.
Use the four-way controller (23)
Sound Efffects
Volume
1 2
to select an item, and use the
four-way controller (45) to
select O or P.
In-focus
AE-L
Self-timer
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the
[Sound Effects 2] screen.
Remote Control
One Push Fiile Foormat
MENU
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
207
Setting the World Time
The date and time set in “Initial Setting” (p.58) serve as the date and time
of your present location. Setting the destination in [World Time] enables
you to display the local date and time on the monitor when traveling
abroad.
1
Select [World Time] in the [R Set-up 1] menu, and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [World Time] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select X (Destination) or W
World Time
Time Setting
(Hometown) for [Time Setting].
Destination
London
This setting is reflected in the date and
16:00
time that appear in the control panel.
Hometown
New York
10:00
MENU
3
4
Press the four-way controller (
3
) to select [
X
Destination],
and press the four-way controller (
The [X Destination] screen appears.
5).
7
Use the four-way controller (45)
Destination
to select a destination city.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to change the
region.
The location, time difference and current
time of the selected city appear.
London
DST
+6:00
16:00
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
5
6
Press the four-way controller (3) to select [DST], and use
the four-way controller (45) to select P or O.
Select O if the destination city uses daylight saving time (DST).
Press the 4 button.
The destination setting is saved and the screen that was displayed in
Step 2 appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears
again.
• Refer to “List of World Time Cities” (p.209) for cities that can be selected as
a destination or hometown.
• Select [W Hometown] in Step 3 to change the city and DST setting.
• X appears in the control panel if [Time Setting] is set to [X Destination].
Also, the video output setting (p.201) changes to the video output format for
that city.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
209
List of World Time Cities
Video
Output
Format
Video
Output
Format
Region
City
Honolulu
Region
City
Istanbul
North
America
NTSC
Africa/
West Asia
PAL
Anchorage
Vancouver
San Francisco
Los Angeles
Calgary
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
PAL
Cairo
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
NTSC
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
PAL
NTSC
Jerusalem
Nairobi
Jeddah
Tehran
Denver
Dubai
Chicago
Karachi
Kabul
Miami
Toronto
Male
New York
Halifax
Delhi
Colombo
Kathmandu
Dacca
Central and Mexico City
South
America
Lima
Santiago
Caracas
Buenos Aires
Sao Paulo
Rio de Janeiro
Lisbon
East Asia
Yangon
Bangkok
Kuala Lumpur
Vientiane
Singapore
Phnom Penh
Ho chi Minh
Jakarta
PAL
NTSC
PAL
Europe
7
Madrid
PAL
London
PAL
Paris
PAL
Hong Kong
Beijing
Amsterdam
Milan
PAL
PAL
Shanghai
Manila
Rome
PAL
Copenhagen
Berlin
PAL
Taipei
PAL
Seoul
Prague
PAL
Tokyo
Stockholm
Budapest
Warsaw
Athens
PAL
Guam
PAL
Oceania
Perth
PAL
Adelaide
Sydney
Noumea
Wellington
Auckland
Pago Pago
PAL
Helsinki
Moscow
Dakar
PAL
PAL
Africa/
PAL
West Asia
Algiers
PAL
Johannesburg
PAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210
Setting the Monitor and the Menu Displays
Setting the LCD Display
You can set the display color of the guide display, status screen, control
panel and menu selection cursor.
1
Select [LCD Display] in the [R Set-up1] menu, and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [LCD Display] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select O or P for [Guide
LCD Display
Guide DDisplaay
Display].
Display Color
1
1/125
F5.6
MENU
7
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Display Color],
and use the four-way controller (45) to select from
twelve display colors.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears
again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
211
Adjusting the Brightness and the Color of the Monitor
Adjusts the brightness and the color of the monitor.
1
Select [LCD Display Settings] in the [R Set-up 1] menu,
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [LCD Display Settings] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Brightness Level],
LCD Display Settings
Brightneess Level
[Adjust: Blue-Amber], or [Adjust:
Green-Magenta].
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
0
Brightness Level
Changes the brightness of the monitor (-7 to +7).
Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B7)
and amber (A7).
Adjust: Blue-Amber
Adjusts the tone of the colors between green
(G7) and magenta (M7).
Adjust: Green-Magenta
7
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to adjust the value.
Available operations
Rear e-dial (S)
Displays a captured image in the background.
| button
Resets the adjustment value to the default
setting.
4
5
Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears
again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212
Setting the Display for Instant Review
You can set the operation and display settings during Instant Review
(p.66).
1
Select [Instant Review] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Instant Review] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
(5), use the four-way controller
(23) to select a display time,
and press the 4 button.
Instant RReview
Display Time
1sec.
Enlarge Instant Review 3sec.
Save RAW Data
Histograam Display
Bright/Daark Area
5sec.
Off
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Enlarge
Instant Review], [Save RAW Data], [Histogram Display] or
[Bright/Dark Area], and use the four-way controller (45)
to select O or P.
7
Enlarge Instant
Review
You can magnify the image on the monitor with the
rear e-dial (S). (p.177)
Sets whether to save the RAW image by pressing the
m button when the file format of the last captured
image is JPEG and its RAW data still remains in the
buffer memory. (p.72)
Save RAW Data
Histogram Display Shows the brightness distribution of an image. (p.33)
Bright (overexposed) portions blink red and dark
Bright/Dark Area
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears
again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
213
Setting the Initial Menu Tab to be Displayed
Set the initial menu tab displayed on the monitor when the 3 button
is pressed.
1
Select [17. Save Menu Location] in the [A Custom Setting
3] menu, and press the four-way controller (5).
The [17. Save Menu Location] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Reset Menu
Location] or [Save Menu Location], and press the
4
button.
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu ([C Movie 1] menu in
Reset Menu Location C mode, and [Q Playback 1] menu in playback
mode) is always displayed first. (default setting)
Save Menu Location The menu tab last selected is displayed first.
3
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.
7
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS Sensor (Pixel Mapping)
Pixel Mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting defective pixels
in the CMOS sensor.
Attach a proper lens to the camera before using Pixel Mapping.
1
Select [Pixel Mapping] in the [R Set-up 4] menu, and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2) to select [Pixel
Mapping], and press the 4 button.
Defective pixels are mapped out and corrected, and the screen that was
displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.
• It takes about 30 seconds to map out and correct the defective pixels.
• When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to
activate Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Install a fully charged
battery, or use the optional AC adapter kit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214
Battery Settings
Minimizing Battery Consumption
You can set the camera to turn off automatically if unused after a certain
length of time.
Set in [Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3] menu. Select from [1min.]
(default setting), [3min.], [5min.], [10min.], [30min.], or [Off].
• Perform any of the following operations to reactivate the camera from Auto
Power Off.
• Turn the camera off and on again.
• Press the shutter release button halfway.
• Press the 3 button or M button.
• Auto Power Off does not function in the following situations:
• when a slideshow is played back
• when the camera is connected to an AV device with a USB cable
• while transferring images via Eye-Fi card
Setting the Battery Type
7
When using the AA battery holder D-BH109, select the type of the AA
batteries to use so the camera can determine the battery level correctly.
The default setting is [Auto-detect].
1
Select [AA Battery Type] in the [R Set-up 3] menu, and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [AA Battery Type] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a battery type, and
1 2 3
AA Battery Type
Auto-deetect
Lithium
press the 4 button.
Nickel-Metal HHydride
Alkaline
When set to [Auto-detect], the camera will
automatically detect the type of batteries
being used.
Exit
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
215
3
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears
again.
When the type of batteries actually being used is different from the item you
selected here, the battery level will not be correctly determined. Please set the
correct battery type. Usually, there is no problem using [Auto-detect], however
it may take a while to detect the battery type. In low temperatures and when
using batteries that were stored for long periods of time, set the appropriate
battery type so the camera can correctly determine the remaining battery level.
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera
(Memory)
You can select which function settings to save when the camera is turned
off. The following function settings can be saved.
Default
Setting
Default
Setting
Function
Flash Mode
Function
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flash Exposure Comp.
Digital Filter
O
P
7
Drive Mode
White Balance
Custom Image
Sensitivity
HDR Capture
P
Shooting Info Display
Playback Info Display
File No.
P
O
O
EV Compensation
This setting cannot be performed when the mode dial is set to B or C.
1
Select [Memory] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Memory 1] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select an item, and use the
four-way controller (45) to
select O or P.
Memory
1 2
Flashh Mode
Drive Mode
White Baalance
Custom Image
Sensitivity
EV Compennsation
Flash Expossure CComp.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the
[Memory 2] screen.
MENU
O
P
Settings are saved even when the camera is turned off.
Settings are returned to their default values when the camera is
turned off.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.
• In [Shooting Info Display], you can set whether to save the type of information
displayed in standby mode. (p.29)
The status screen is always displayed first when the camera is
turned on.
P
The display selected from the Shooting Info Display selection
O
screen (other than [Electronic Compass]) appears when the
camera is turned on.
7
• Set [File No.] to O to continue the sequential numbering (four digits) for the
file name even if a new folder is created.
The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is
O
P
saved and subsequent images are assigned sequential file
numbers even if a new folder is created.
The file number of the first image saved to a folder returns to 0001
each time a new folder is created for saving images.
• When [Reset] of the [R Set-up 3] menu is performed, all Memory settings
return to the default values. (p.217)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
217
Resetting the Camera Settings
Resets the settings you selected in the menu screen to the default values.
You cannot reset the settings when the mode dial is set to B or C.
Resetting the Rec. Mode/Movie/Playback/Set-up Menus
Settings of the direct keys and for the items of the [A Rec. Mode] menu,
[C Movie] menu, [Q Playback] menu, [R Set-up] menu, and playback
mode palette can be reset to default values.
1
Select [Reset] in the [R Set-up 3] menu, and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [Reset] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2) to select [Reset], and
press the 4 button.
7
The settings are reset, and the screen that was displayed before
selecting the menu item appears again.
The following settings are not reset.
- Saved USER mode settings
- Language/u
- Flicker Reduction
- Video Out
- Date Adjustment
- Copyright Information
-
The city and DST settings for World Time - [A Custom Setting] menu items
Resetting the Custom Menu
Settings for the items of the [A Custom Setting] menu can be reset to
default values.
1
Select [Reset Custom Functions] in the [A Custom Setting
3] menu, and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Reset Custom Functions] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218
2
Press the four-way controller (2) to select [Reset], and
press the 4 button.
The settings are reset, and the screen that was displayed before
selecting the menu item appears again.
Checking the Camera Version Information
You can check the version information for software (firmware) in the
camera. If an update file for the firmware is released, you can update the
camera to the latest firmware version.
Visit our website for more information and procedural details regarding
updates.
1
Select [Firmware Info/Options] in the [R Set-up 4] menu,
and press the four-way controller (5).
The firmware version for the camera is
Firmwware Inffoo/Options
displayed on the [Firmware Info/Options]
Camera
screen.
7
Ver:X.XX
At this point, if an update file is saved on
your SD Memory Card, you can run the
update.
MENU
2
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.
• You cannot restore a camera to its previous firmware version after updating
it.
• Before running the update, be sure to save the data on your SD Memory Card
to a computer or other location.
•
When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to update
the firmware] is displayed on the monitor. Install a fully charged battery, or use
the optional AC adapter kit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
219
File Management Settings
Formatting an SD Memory Card
Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused
or has been used on other devices.
Formatting deletes all the data saved on the SD Memory Card.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be
damaged and become unusable.
• Formatting deletes all data, both protected and unprotected.
1
Select [Format] in the [R Set-up 4] menu, and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [Format] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Format], and press the
4 button.
Format
All datta willl be delleted
ġ
7
Formatting starts.
Format
When formatting is completed, the screen
that was displayed before selecting the
Cancel
OK OK
menu item appears again.
When an SD Memory Card is formatted, the volume label assigned to the card
is “K-500”. When this camera is connected to a computer, the SD Memory Card
is recognized as a removable disk with the name “K-500”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect)
You can protect images from being accidentally deleted.
Even protected images are deleted if the inserted SD Memory Card is
formatted.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in the single image
display of playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select Z
(Protect), and press the 4 button.
The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Single image] or [All
images], and press the 4
Singlee image
button.
All images
If you selected [All images], proceed to
7
Step 5.
OK OK
MENU
4
5
Turn the front e-dial (R) to select an image.
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Protect], and press the
100-0001
4 button.
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the
protection of the image.
Protect
The image is protected and the Y icon
appears at the top right of the screen.
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to protect other
images.
Unprotect
Exit
OK OK
MENU
If you selected [All images] in Step 3, the camera returns to the single
image display.
6
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to the single image display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
221
Setting the Naming System of the Folder
When images are captured with this camera, a folder is automatically
created and the captured images are stored in the new folder. Each folder
name consists of a sequential number from 100 to 999 and a string of 5
characters. The string of characters can be changed.
1
Select [Folder Name] in the [R Set-up 2] menu, and press
the four-way controller (5).
2
Press the four-way controller (5), use the four-way
controller (23) to select [Date] or [PENTX], and press the
4 button.
The two digits of the month and day on which the picture was taken
are assigned as the folder name in the form of [xxx_MMDD].
(default setting)
[MMDD] (month and day) appears according to the display
Date
format set in [Date Adjustment] (p.60).
Example: 101_0125 (folder for images taken on January 25th)
7
The folder name is assigned in the form of [xxxPENTX].
“PENTX” can be changed to a string of characters of your
PENTX
choice.
Example: 101PENTX
If you selected [Date], proceed to Step 6.
3
4
Press the four-way controller (3), select [***PENTX] and
press the four-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.
Change the text.
Folder Name
Text selection
cursor
Finish
Text input cursor
Reset
Cancel
OK Enter
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222
Available operations
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the text selection cursor.
Moves the text input cursor.
Rear e-dial (S)
4 button
Enters a character selected with the text selection
cursor at the position of the text input cursor.
d button
Returns the folder name to [PENTX].
5
6
After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to
[Finish], and press the 4 button.
The folder name is changed.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears
again.
A maximum of 500 images can be stored in a single folder. When the number
of captured images exceeds 500, a new folder is created to store the additional
images. In Exposure Bracketing shooting, images will be stored in the same
folder until shooting is completed, even if the number of images exceeds 500.
7
Creating New Folders
You can create a new folder on the SD Memory Card. A folder is created with
the number following the number of the folder currently being used. The newly
created folder is used to store images starting with the next captured image.
1
Select [Create New Folder] in the [R Set-up 2] menu, and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Create New Folder] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
223
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Create folder], and
press the 4 button.
Create New Folder
Creates a nnew stoorage ffolder
with thhe folllowingg name:
101PENTX
A folder with a new number is created.
Create folder
Cancel
OK OK
Only one folder can be created using this operation. Multiple empty folders
cannot be created consecutively.
Setting the File Name
You can change the file names of images.
The default naming conventions are as follows depending on the [Color
Space] (p.142) setting in [Image Capture Settings] of the [A Rec. Mode
1] menu.
“xxxx” indicates the file number, and is displayed as a four-digit sequential
number.
7
Color Space
sRGB
File Name
IMGPxxxx.JPG
_IMGxxxx.JPG
AdobeRGB
For sRGB, you can change [IMGP] (4 characters) to the desired
characters.
For AdobeRGB, of the 4 characters you selected, the first 3 are assigned
in place of [IMG].
Example: When set to [ABCDxxxx.JPG], files are named
[_ABCxxxx.JPG] for AdobeRGB.
1
Select [File Name] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [File Name] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224
3
Change the text.
Enter the text in the same way as [Folder Name]. Refer to Steps 4 to 6
on p.221.
Selecting the File Number Setting
You can select a method for assigning the file number of an image when
saved to a new folder. Set in [File No.] of [Memory] (p.215) in the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu.
The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is saved and
O
P
subsequent images are assigned sequential file numbers even if a new
folder is created.
time a new folder is created for saving images.
Setting the Photographer Information
The camera type, shooting conditions and other information are
automatically embedded in captured images in Exif data format. You can
embed photographer information in this Exif.
7
Use the provided software (p.235) to check the Exif information.
1
Select [Copyright Information] in the [R Set-up 2] menu,
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Copyright Information] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select P or O.
Copyright Innformmaation
Embedd Copyyrright Data
Photogrrapher
Does not embed copyright
information in the Exif. (default
setting)
P
Copyrightt Holder
Embeds copyright information in
the Exif.
MENU
O
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
225
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select
[Photographer], and press the four-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.
Enter the text.
Photogrrapher
Textselection
cursor
Up to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric
Finish
characters and
symbols can be
entered.
Text input cursor
Delete One Chharacter
Cancel
OK Enter
MENU
Available operations
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the text selection cursor.
Moves the text input cursor.
Rear e-dial (S)
m button
Switches between upper and lower case
letters.
4 button
Enters a character selected with the text
selection cursor at the position of the text input
cursor.
7
U/i button
Deletes a character at the position of the text
input cursor.
5
6
7
After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to
[Finish], and press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Copyright Information] screen.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Copyright
Holder], and enter the text in the same way as
[Photographer].
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears
again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226
Using an Eye-Fi Card
You can transfer images to your computer via wireless LAN by using an
SD Memory Card with a built-in wireless LAN (Eye-Fi card).
• Be sure to set up a wireless LAN access point on a computer in advance for
the Eye-Fi card connection. It cannot be set up on the camera.
• Images are not transferred in the following cases:
• when an image has already been transferred
• when the size of a movie is 2 GB or more
• when an Eye-Fi card is write protected
• when a wireless LAN access point cannot be found
• when the battery level is low (battery level is F (red))
• For RAW images and movie files, the success of transfer depends on the
specifications and settings of the Eye-Fi card in use.
1
Select [Eye-Fi] in the [R Set-up 2] menu, and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [Eye-Fi] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Eye-Fi
Communication], and press the four-way controller (5).
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
Eye-Fi
to select the action, and press the
4 button.
Eye-Fi CCommuunication
Communication Info
Automatticallly trannsfers
unsent imaages frroom memorry card
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
Images that have not been transferred will be transferred
automatically. Images will also be transferred when images
are taken, new images are saved, or images are overwritten.
AUTO
Transfers the unsent images on the card that are
selected in playback mode (p.227).
SELECT
OFF
Turns off the wireless LAN function.
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
227
• When an Eye-Fi card is used, a new folder is created for every 100 images
saved.
• Auto Power Off does not function when images are being transferred.
• When transferring a large number of images, use the optional AC adapter kit
or install a fully charged battery. If the internal temperature of the camera
becomes high during transferring images, the camera may be turned off
automatically to protect the camera circuitry. In such a case, turn on the
camera again after a while, and data transfer will resume.
• Select [Communication Info] in Step 2 on p.226 to check the firmware version
of the Eye-Fi card.
Transferring Selected Images
When [SELECT] is set in Step 3 on p.226, only the selected images are
transferred.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in the single image
display of playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select N (Eye-Fi
Image Transfer), and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the unit of transfer appears.
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the unit of
transfer, and press the 4 button.
Enables selecting individual images (in one folder, up to
100 images).
Select image(s) • For images taken with [File Format] set to [RAW+],
JPEG and RAW files saved are counted as one image,
and both files are transferred.
Transfers all of the images stored in the selected folder.
Select a folder • Up to 100 images that can be transferred from the
selected folder are transferred.
The folder selection screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228
4
5
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the folder
to transfer, and press the 4 button.
When [Select image(s)] is selected, the screen to select the image(s)
appears.
When [Select a folder] is selected, the transfer confirmation screen
appears. Proceed to Step 7.
Select the image(s) to transfer.
-
002/100
100 0202
Images with the C, O, or ? icon shown
on the thumbnail cannot be selected.
Cancel OK
Finish
INFO
MENU
Available operations
Four-way controller
Moves the selection frame.
(2345)
Rear e-dial (S)
Displays the selected image in the single image
display when turned to the right; returns to
thumbnail display when turned to the left.
4 button
Confirms/cancels the image selection.
7
6
7
Press the M button.
The images to be transferred are specified.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Transfer], and
press the 4 button.
After the message [Transfer request accepted] appears, the camera
returns to the single image display.
• Transferring process cannot be canceled once started.
• Only images captured in JPEG (.JPG) or RAW (.DNG) format can be
selected. Movies and Interval Movies cannot be selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
229
Setting the DPOF Settings
By adding DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) settings to stored images on
the SD Memory Card, you can specify the number of copies and whether
to imprint the date on the images in advance and order conventional
photograph prints by taking this SD Memory Card to a store for printing.
• DPOF settings cannot be applied to RAW images and movies.
• You can make DPOF settings for up to 999 images.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in the single image
display of playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select r (DPOF),
and press the 4 button.
The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Single image] or [All
7
images], and press the 4
Singlee image
button.
All images
If you selected [All images], proceed to
Step 5.
OK OK
MENU
4
5
Turn the front e-dial (R) to
select an image.
100-0001
Copies
Date
00
Date
INFO
OK OK
MENU
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the number of copies.
You can set up to 99 copies.
K appears at the top right of the screen for images with DPOF settings.
To cancel the DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230
6
7
Press the M button to select P or O for printing the
date.
P
The date is not printed.
The date is printed.
O
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to make DPOF settings for other images.
Press the 4 button.
The DPOF settings for the selected image or all images are saved and
the camera returns to the single image display.
• Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab,
the date may not be printed on the pictures.
• The number of copies specified for all images is applied to all the images, and
that specified for a single image is canceled.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Connecting to a
Computer
This chapter explains how to connect the camera to a
computer, install the supplied software on the CD-ROM,
etc.
Manipulating Captured Images on a
Computer ............................................................232
Saving Images on a Computer ..........................233
Using the Provided Software ............................235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232
Manipulating Captured Images on a
Computer
The captured still pictures and movies can be transferred to a computer by
connecting the camera using a USB cable, and RAW images can be
developed using the provided software “SILKYPIX Developer Studio 3.0
LE”.
When connecting the camera to a computer and using the software, we
recommend using a computer with the following system requirements.
Windows
Windows XP (SP3 or later, 32-bit Home/Pro), Windows Vista (32-bit,
64-bit), Windows 7 (32-bit, 64-bit), Windows 8 (32-bit, 64-bit)
• Installation requires administrator rights
OS
• Can be run as a 32-bit application on any 64-bit Edition of Windows
Intel Pentium-compatible processor (Pentium 4, Athlon XP or higher
recommended)
CPU
• Supports multi-core processors (Intel Core i5, i7; Core 2 Quad, Duo;
AMD Phenom II X4, X6; Athlon II X2, X4; and other)
RAM
HDD
1 GB minimum (2 GB or more recommended)
For installing and starting up the program: 100 MB minimum of free space
For saving image files: Approx. 10 MB/file
Monitor 1024×768 dots, 24-bit full color or higher
Others Input devices such as a keyboard and mouse
8
Macintosh
OS
Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7 or 10.8
CPU
RAM
Intel processor-compatible, Power PC
1 GB minimum (2 GB or more recommended)
For installing and starting up the program: 100 MB minimum of free space
For saving image files: Approx. 10 MB/file
HDD
Monitor 1024×768 dots, 24-bit full color or higher
Others Input devices such as a keyboard and mouse
• Use the provided software to develop RAW images captured with this
camera.
• QuickTime is required to play back movies transferred to a computer. You
can download it from the following site:
http://www.apple.com/quicktime/
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
233
Saving Images on a Computer
Setting the USB Connection Mode
Set the USB connection mode when connecting the camera to a
computer.
1
Select [Interface Options] in the [R Set-up 2] menu, and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Interface Options] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [USB
Connection], and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [MSC] or [PTP],
and press the 4 button.
Mass Storage Class (default setting)
MSC A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected
to a computer via USB as a memory device.
Picture Transfer Protocol
PTP A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital
cameras via USB.
8
Unless otherwise specified, select [MSC].
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears
again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234
Connecting the Camera and a Computer
Connect the camera to a computer using the provided USB cable I-USB7.
1
Turn the computer on.
2
Turn the camera off, and use the USB cable to connect the
VIDEO/PC terminal of the camera and the computer.
3
Turn the camera on.
The camera is recognized as a removable disk or an SD Memory Card
with a volume label “K-500”.
8
If the “K-500” dialog appears when the camera is turned on, select [Open
folder to view files using Windows Explorer] and click the OK button.
4
5
Save the captured images to the computer.
Copy the image file(s) or folder(s) to the hard disk of the computer.
Disconnect the camera from the computer.
The camera cannot be operated while it is connected to the computer. Turn off
the camera and remove the USB cable to enable operating the camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
235
Using the Provided Software
“SILKYPIX Developer Studio 3.0 LE” is included on the CD-ROM (S-
SW133). With the SILKYPIX Developer Studio 3.0 LE, you can develop
RAW files, adjust the color of the images and other settings, and save the
new images in JPEG or TIFF format.
Installing the Software
You can install the software from the provided CD-ROM.
When multiple accounts have been set up on a computer, log on with an
account that has administrative rights before installing the software.
1
Turn the computer on.
Make sure no other software is running.
2
Place the CD-ROM into the CD/DVD drive on the computer.
The [Software Installer] screen appears.
If the [Software Installer] screen does not appear
• For Windows
8
1 Click [My Computer] from the Start menu.
2 Double-click the [CD/DVD drive (S-SW133)] icon.
3 Double-click the [Setup.exe] icon.
• For Macintosh
1 Double-click the CD/DVD (S-SW133) icon on the desktop.
2 Double-click the [PENTAX Installer] icon.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236
3
Click [SILKYPIX Developer
Studio 3.0 LE].
For Macintosh, follow the instructions
on the screen to perform subsequent
steps.
4
5
Select the desired language in the [Choose Setup
Language] screen, and click [OK].
When the [InstallShield Wizard] screen appears in the
selected language, click [Next].
Follow the instructions on the screen to perform subsequent steps.
Start SILKYPIX Developer Studio 3.0 LE and see the help menu for details on
using the software program.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
237
Regarding User Registration
To better serve you, please take a moment to register your software.
Click [User Registration] on the
screen in Step 3 on p.236.
A world map for Internet User
Registration is displayed.If the
computer is connected to the
Internet, click the displayed country
or area and then follow the
instructions to register your software.
Note that you can only register online
if your country or area is shown.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 Using the Flash
This chapter provides details on the built-in flash and
describes how to take pictures with an external flash.
Using the Built-in Flash .....................................240
Using an External Flash (Optional) ..................243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240
Using the Built-in Flash
Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode
Using the Flash in b Mode
Any desired shutter speed of 1/180 sec. or slower can be set.
Using the Flash in c Mode
The shutter speed automatically changes over a range from 1/180 sec. to
a slow shutter speed that reduces camera shake (the slowest shutter
speed depends on the focal length of the lens in use).
The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens is used.
Using the Slow-speed Sync Flash
You can use Slow-speed Sync in . (Night Scene Portrait) of H mode
or b, L or a mode when shooting portraits with the sunset in the
background. Both the portrait and the background are captured
beautifully. G and H can be used in e, K or c mode.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
241
Using e/K/c Mode
1
Set the mode dial to e, K or c.
2
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up.
3
Set the flash mode to G or H.
The shutter speed is set slower to give a proper exposure for the
background.
4
Take a picture.
Using b/L/a Mode
1
Set the mode dial to b, L or a.
2
3
Set the flash mode to E or F.
Set the shutter speed (for b mode) or shutter speed and
aperture value (for L or a mode).
Set so a proper exposure is obtained at a shutter speed of 1/180 seconds
or slower.
9
4
5
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up.
Take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash
Relationships among the guide number, aperture and distance must be
considered when shooting with the flash to obtain a correct exposure.
Calculate the shooting distance or aperture value in the following way, and
adjust the shooting conditions if the flash output is not sufficient.
Built-in Flash
Guide Number
Approx. 12
Approx. 17
Approx. 24
Approx. 34
Approx. 48
Built-in Flash
Guide Number
Approx. 68
ISO Sensitivity
ISO Sensitivity
ISO 100
ISO 200
ISO 400
ISO 800
ISO 1600
ISO 3200
ISO 6400
ISO 12800
ISO 25600
ISO 51200
Approx. 96
Approx. 136
Approx. 192
Approx. 272
Calculating Shooting Distance from Aperture Value
The following equation calculates the effective distance of the flash.
Maximum flash distance L1 = Guide number ÷ Aperture value
Minimum flash distance L2 = Maximum flash distance ÷ 5 *
* The value used in the formula above is a fixed value which
applies only when using the built-in flash alone.
Example:
When the sensitivity is ISO 200 and the aperture value is F5.6:
L1 = 17 ÷ 5.6 = approx. 3 (m)
L2 = 3 ÷ 5 = approx. 0.6 (m)
Therefore, the flash can be used in a range of about 0.6 m to 3 m.
However, the built-in flash in this camera cannot be used when the
distance is 0.7 m or less. When the flash is used at distances closer
than 0.7 m, it causes vignetting in the picture corners, light is
distributed unevenly and the picture may be overexposed.
9
Calculating Aperture Value from Shooting Distance
The following equation calculates the correct aperture value.
Aperture value F = Guide number ÷ Shooting distance
Example:
When the sensitivity is ISO 200 and the shooting distance is 4 m:
F = 17 ÷ 4 = approx. 4.2
If the resulting number (4.2, in the above example) is not available
as a lens aperture, a smaller number that is closest (4.0, in the
above example) is generally used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
243
Using an External Flash (Optional)
Using an optional external flash AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC enables a variety of flash modes such as P-TTL auto flash
mode.
z: Available
#: Some functions are restricted.
×: Functions are unavailable.
Flash
Built-in
Flash
AF540FGZ AF200FG
AF360FGZ AF160FC
Camera Function
Red-eye reduction flash
Auto flash discharge
z
z
z
z
z
z
Automatically switching to the flash sync
speed
z
z
z
z
z
z
Aperture value is automatically set in
mode
e
and
b
P-TTL auto flash
z*1
z
z
×
z*1
z
z*1
z
z
×
Slow-speed Sync
Flash exposure compensation
AF assist light of external flash
z
z
*2
z
z
×
Trailing Curtain Sync
*3
*4
Contrast control sync flash
Slave flash
#
z
#
×
×
z
×
×
×
High-speed sync
Wireless flash
z
z*5
9
*4
#
*1 Available only when using a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens.
*2 Shutter speed of 1/90 sec. or slower.
*3 When combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, 1/3 of the flash discharge can be
output by the built-in flash and 2/3 can be output by the external flash.
*4 Available only when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
*5 Multiple AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units, or a combination of an AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ
unit and the built-in flash is required.
• Flashes with reversed polarity (the center contact on the hot shoe is minus)
cannot be used due to the risk of damaging the camera and/or flash.
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts,
such as a Hot Shoe Grip, as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244
Using the P-TTL Auto Flash
You can use the P-TTL auto flash with an AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ,
AF200FG or AF160FC flash unit.
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe, and attach the external
flash.
2
3
4
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
Set the external flash mode to [P-TTL].
Make sure that the external flash is fully charged, and then
take a picture.
The b will light in the viewfinder or Live View screen when the flash is
ready (fully charged).
• For details such as operation method and effective distance, refer to the
external flash manual.
• Never press the E button when any external flash unit is attached to the
camera. The built-in flash will hit the external flash. If you want to use both at
once, set the wireless mode or connect them using the extension cord.
(p.248)
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
245
Using the High-speed Sync Flash
With an AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ flash unit, you can discharge a flash to
take a picture at a shutter speed faster than 1/180 seconds.
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe, and attach the external
flash.
2
3
4
Set the mode dial to b or a.
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
Set the external flash sync mode to HSb (high-speed
sync).
5
Make sure that the external flash is fully charged, and then
take a picture.
The b will light in the viewfinder or Live View screen when the flash is
ready (fully charged).
•
High-speed sync is available only when the shutter speed is set faster than
1/180 sec.
• High-speed sync is not available in p mode.
• High-speed sync is not available with the built-in flash.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246
Using Flash in Wireless Mode
By using two external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) or using the
built-in flash with one or more external flashes, you can shoot in P-TTL
flash mode without connecting the flash units with a cord.
• Set the external flash to WIRELESS.
• Two or more AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes are required to use the
high-speed sync flash in wireless mode. This function cannot be used in
combination with the built-in flash.
• Set the wireless mode of the external flash not directly connected to the
camera to SLAVE.
Setting the Channel for the External Flash
First, set the channel for the external flash unit.
1
Set the channel for the external flash unit.
2
Remove the cover of the hot shoe, and attach the external
flash.
3
Turn on the camera and the external flash, and press the
shutter release button halfway.
The built-in flash is set to the same channel as the external flash unit.
9
Be sure to set all the flashes to the same channel. Refer to the manual of the
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ for details on how to set the channel on the external
flash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
247
Wireless Shooting Using a Combination of the Built-in
Flash and an External Flash Unit
Set the camera to wireless flash mode when using an external flash in
combination with the built-in flash.
1
Remove the external flash unit after the channel is set on
the camera, and place it at the desired location.
2
Set the camera’s flash mode to
r.
Wireless Mode
The camera is ready to take a picture.
The channel for the built-in flash is
0.0
displayed in the viewfinder.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
3
4
Press the E button.
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged, and then take
a picture.
r is not available in the following situations.
• In C mode
• when the drive mode is set to [Remote Control (3 sec. delay)]
• when the lens aperture ring is set to a position other than s
9
You can change the built-in flash discharge method used in wireless mode. Set
in [16. Flash in Wireless Mode] of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu.
Discharges the built-in flash as a master flash. (default
setting)
On
Off
Discharges the built-in flash as a control flash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248
Wireless Shooting Using a Combination of External
Flash Units
1
Set the wireless mode of the external flash directly
connected to the camera to [MASTER] or [CONTROL].
Discharge both the flash directly connected to the
MASTER
camera and the wireless flash unit as the main flash.
Discharges the flash directly connected to the camera as
CONTROL
a control flash only, not as the main flash.
2
3
On the wireless remote flash unit, set the wireless flash
mode to [SLAVE] and set the channel to the same channel
as the flash directly connected to the camera. Then, place
it at the desired location.
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged, and then take
a picture.
• The Shake Reduction function is not available.
• When using multiple AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes and shooting
with the high-speed sync flash in wireless mode, set the flash directly
connected to the camera to high-speed sync flash mode.
9
Connecting an External Flash with an
Extension Cord
When using an external flash away from the camera, attach the Hot Shoe
Adapter FG (1; optional) to the camera hot shoe and an Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (2; optional) to the bottom of the external flash, and then
connect these with the Extension Cord F5P (3; optional). The Off-
Camera Shoe Adapter F can be mounted to your tripod using the tripod
screw.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
249
When combining with the built-in flash
2
1
3
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension Cords
You can combine two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG).
For connecting an AF540FGZ flash unit, you can use the extension cord
connection terminal on the flash. For connecting an AF360FGZ or
AF200FG flash unit, as shown in the illustration, connect an external flash
and the Hot Shoe Adapter F (4; optional) to the Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (2; optional) and then connect another Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (2) with external flash using the Extension Cord F5P (3;
optional).
Refer to the manual of the flash for details.
When combining two external flashes
2
4
9
3
3
1
2
When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-in
flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250
Using the Contrast Control Sync Flash
Combining two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash
allows multiple flash photography (contrast control sync flash
photography). This is based on the difference between the amounts of
light discharged from multiple units.
The AF200FG must be combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
1
Connect the external flash to the camera indirectly.
Refer to p.248 for details.
2
3
Set the sync mode for the external flash to contrast-
control-sync mode.
Confirm that both the external flash and built-in flash are
fully charged and then take a picture.
• When using two or more external flashes and the contrast control sync mode
is set on the external master flash unit, the flash output ratio is 2 (master unit)
: 1 (slave units). When an external flash is used in combination with the built-
in flash, the flash output ratio is 2 (external flash) : 1 (built-in flash).
• When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-
in flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Appendix
Default Settings ..................................................252
Functions Available with Various Lens
Combinations .....................................................259
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor ...............................264
Error Messages ..................................................270
Troubleshooting .................................................273
Main Specifications ............................................276
Index ....................................................................283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252
Default Settings
The table below shows the factory default settings.
The functions set in Memory (p.215) are saved even when the camera is
turned off.
Reset Setting
Yes: The setting returns to the default setting with the reset function
(p.217).
No: The setting is saved even after reset.
Direct Keys
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
p.87
ISO AUTO
(ISO 100 to 3200)
Sensitivity
Yes
White Balance
Flash Mode
F
Yes
Yes
p.143
p.68
Depends on capture mode
p.93
p.118
p.120
p.122
Drive Mode
Single Frame Shooting
Yes
[A Rec. Mode] Menu
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
Exposure Mode
Custom Image
Scene Mode
Digital Filter
e
Bright
Portrait
No Filter
Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
p.172
p.155
p.84
10
p.159
HDR Capture
HDR
Capture
Auto Align
On
p.149
Exposure Bracket Value
±2 EV
JPEG
File Format
Image
p.141
p.141
p.142
p.142
JPEG Recorded Pixels
p
Capture
Settings
JPEG Quality
Color Space
C
sRGB
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
253
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
AE Metering
Multi-segment
Yes
Yes
Yes
p.97
AF.A
Off
Off
p.103
p.105
Expanded Area AF
AF
Settings
Auto
(5 AF Points)
AF Active Area
Yes
p.104
p.103
AF Assist Light
Distortion Correction
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj
Number of Shots
Auto EV Adjustment
Interval
On
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On
Lens
Correction
p.151
p.127
2 times
Off
Multi-
exposure
00:00'03"
2 images
Now
Number of Shots
Start Interval
Interval
Shooting
p.124
p.148
Start Time
12:00 AM/00:00
Auto
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
D-Range
Settings
Auto
High-ISO NR
Auto
p.98
Slow Shutter Speed NR
X-Y direction
Composition
Rotation
Adjust.
Auto
p.100
Center
±0°
Yes
p.153
Recall Previous Position
Off
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
On
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
p.116
p.262
p.106
p.109
p.111
35 mm
Face Detection
Off
Contrast AF
AF Autozoom
Focus Peaking
Off
10
Live View Grid Display
Info Overlay
Off
On
p.107
Histogram Display
Bright/Dark Area
Off
Off
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
p.212
Display Time
1sec.
On
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Enlarge Instant Review
Save RAW Data
Histogram Display
Bright/Dark Area
Instant
Review
On
Off
Off
Rb, Sc,
e
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
|}e
R
--, So
--
Rb, S--
--
,
K
b
|
,
|
E-Dial
Programming
R--, Sc,
c
p.162
|
--
Rb, Sc,
L/a
p
|eLINE
R--, Sc,
|
--
--, S--
--
R
,
C
|
One Push
File Format
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
p.165
p.167
Button
Customization
(still pictures/movies)
Enable AF1
Digital Filter, HDR Capture,
Shooting Info Display
Off
On
p
Memory
p.215
Other than the above functions
Action
in B Mode
Timed
Exposure
10
Off
5'00"
On
Yes
Yes
Yes
ASTRO-
TRACER
Exposure Time
GPS
p.267
GPS LED
Indicators
Calibration
—
1min.
On
—
Positioning Interval
GPS Time Sync
Yes
Yes
—
Yes *1 p.168
Save USER Mode
*1 The saved settings are reset only with [Reset USER Mode] in the [Save USER Mode]
screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
255
[C Movie] Menu
Item
Reset
Setting
Default Setting
Page
p.129
Exposure Setting
Yes
e
Recorded
Pixels
a
Yes
Movie Capture
Settings
Framerate
30 fps
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Quality Level
C
3
Recording Sound Level
Movie SR
On
Interval
3sec.
Recording
Time
00:00'12"
Yes
Interval Movie
p.133
Page
Start Interval
Start Time
Now
Yes
Yes
12:00 AM/00:00
Playback Mode Palette
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Image Rotation
Digital Filter
—
—
p.183
p.189
Monochrome
Yes
Maximum size
according to the setting
Resize
—
—
p.187
p.188
Maximum size
according to the setting
Cropping
Index
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
No
No
Yes
—
p.194
p.220
p.229
p.182
p.146
p.158
Protect
10
DPOF
Slideshow
Save as Manual WB
Save Cross Processing
Yes
Recorded Pixels: p
Quality Level: C
RAW Development
Yes
p.196
Movie Edit
—
—
—
—
p.137
p.227
Eye-Fi Image Transfer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256
[Q Playback] Menu
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
p.181
Display Duration
3sec.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
Slideshow
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback
Quick Zoom
p.176
Bright/Dark Area
Delete All Images
[R Set-up] Menu
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
p.58
p.60
Language/u
Date Adjustment
English
01/01/2013
Time Setting
Hometown
Destination (City)
World Time Destination (DST)
Hometown (City)
Same as Hometown
Same as Hometown
According to initial setting
According to initial setting
According to initial setting
p.207
Hometown (DST)
p.59
Text Size
Volume
Sound
3
Yes
Yes
p.206
Effects
Setting
All on
Guide Display
Display Color
On
LCD Display
p.210
1
LCD Display Settings
Flicker Reduction
±0
Yes
No
p.211
p.27
50 Hz
10
Video Out
USB Connection
According to initial setting
No
p.201
p.233
p.221
p.222
p.223
Interface
Options
MSC
Date
—
Yes
Yes
—
Folder Name
Create New Folder
File Name
IMGP
No
Embed Copyright
Data
Off
No
Copyright
p.224
Information Photographer
—
—
No
No
Copyright Holder
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
257
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Off
Page
p.226
Eye-Fi
Communication
Yes
Eye-Fi
Communication Info
—
—
Yes
Yes
—
Auto Power Off
AA Battery Type
Reset
1min.
p.214
p.214
p.217
p.213
Auto-detect
—
—
—
—
Pixel Mapping
Dust Removal
—
Dust
Removal
p.264
Startup Action/
Shutdown Action
Off
Yes
Sensor Cleaning
Format
—
—
—
—
—
—
p.265
p.219
p.218
Firmware Info/Options
[A Custom Setting] Menu
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
1. EV Steps
1/3 EV Steps
1 EV Step
10sec.
Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
p.92
p.88
p.97
p.96
p.97
p.93
p.95
p.91
p.145
—
2. Sensitivity Steps
3. Meter Operating Time
4. AE-L with AF Locked
5. Link AE and AF Point
6. Bracketing Order
Off
0 – +
7. One-Push Bracketing
8. Bulb (B) Mode Options
9. WB When Using Flash
10. AWB in Tungsten Light
11. Color Temperature Steps
12. AF.S Setting
Off
Mode1
10
Auto White Balance
Subtle Correction
Kelvin
Focus-priority
Focus-priority
Off
p.147
p.102
p.103
p.121
p.71
p.247
13. AF.C Setting
14. AF with Remote Control
15. Release While Charging
16. Flash in Wireless Mode
Off
On
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
17. Save Menu Location
18. Catch-in Focus
Reset Menu Location
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
p.213
p.113
p.112
p.263
p.217
Off
Off
19. AF Fine Adjustment
20. Using Aperture Ring
Reset Custom Functions
Disable
—
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
259
Functions Available with Various
Lens Combinations
All camera capture modes are available when DA, DA L, or FA J lens is
used, or when a lens with an s position is used with the aperture ring set
to the s position.
When they are used in a position other than s, or other lenses are used,
the following restrictions apply.
z: Functions are available when the aperture ring is set to the s
position.
#: Some functions are restricted.
x: Functions are unavailable.
DA
DA L
D FA
FA J
FA *6
F *6
A
M
P
Lens
[Mount type]
[KAF]
[KAF]
[KAF]
[KA]
[K]
[KAF2]
[KAF3]
[KAF2]
Function
Autofocus
(Lens only)
z
–
z
–
z
–
–
#
–
#
(With AF adapter 1.7x) *1
Manual focus
(With the focus indicator)
*2
z
z
z
z
z
(With matte field)
*4
Quick-shift focus
#
×
×
×
×
×
×
*8
Focus point selection mode [Auto]
AE Metering [Multi-segment]
e/K/b/c/L mode
a mode
z
z
z
z
z
–
z
z
z
z
z
×
z
z
z
z
z
–
#
z
z
z
z
–
*9
#
#
×
–
10
P-TTL auto flash *3
Power zoom
Automatically obtaining the lens focal
length information
z
z
z
×
×
×
×
*7
Lens Correction
z *5
×
×
*1 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F2.8 or faster. Only available at the s position.
*2 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F5.6 or faster.
*3 Available when using the built-in flash, AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or AF160FC.
*4 Only available with compatible lenses.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260
*5 Distortion Correction is disabled when a DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm lens is used.
*6 To use an FA SOFT 28mm F2.8 lens, FA SOFT 85mm F2.8 lens, or F SOFT 85mm F2.8
lens, set [20. Using Aperture Ring] to [Enable] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu.
Pictures can be taken with the aperture you set, but only within manual aperture range.
*7 Only available with an FA 31mm F1.8 Limited, FA 43mm F1.9 Limited, or FA 77mm F1.8
Limited lens.
*8 Fixed to [Spot].
*9 c Automatic Exposure with the aperture open. (The aperture ring has no effect on the
actual aperture value.)
Lens names and mount names
DA lenses with a motor and FA zoom lenses with power zoom use the KAF2
mount. DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and no AF coupler use the KAF3
mount.
FA single focal length lenses (non-zoom lenses), DA or DA L lenses without a
motor, and D FA, FA J and F lenses use the KAF mount.
Refer to respective lens manuals for details. Note that this camera is not
equipped with a power zoom function.
Lenses and accessories that cannot be used with
this camera
When the aperture ring is set to a position other than s or a lens without
an s position or accessories such as an auto extension tube or auto
bellows are used, the camera will not operate unless [20. Using Aperture
Ring] is set to [Enable] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu. Refer to “Using
the Aperture Ring” (p.263) for details.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
261
Lens and Built-in Flash
Depending on the lens used with this camera, the use of the built-in flash
may not be available or may be limited due to vignetting.
The built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully discharges when A lenses
not set to the s position, lenses manufactured prior to the A lenses or soft
focus lenses are used.
DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, and FA lenses not listed below can be used without
problems.
* The following lenses were evaluated without a hood.
Unavailable due to vignetting
Lens Name
DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm F3.5-4.5 ED (IF)
DA 12-24mm F4 ED AL
DA 14mm F2.8 ED (IF)
FAE 300mm F2.8 ED (IF)
DAE 560mm F5.6 ED AW
FAE 600mm F4 ED (IF)
FAE 250-600mm F5.6 ED (IF)
Available with some restrictions
Lens Name
Restrictions
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less
than 20 mm.
F FISH-EYE 17-28mm F3.5-4.5
When the focal length is less than 28 mm, or
when the focal length is 28 mm and the shooting
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.
DA 16-45mm F4 ED AL
When the focal length is 20 mm or less or when
the focal length is 35 mm and the shooting
distance is less than 1.5 m, vignetting may occur.
DAE 16-50mm F2.8 ED AL (IF)
SDM
10
When the focal length is less than 24 mm or
when the focal length is 35 mm and the shooting
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.
DA 17-70mm F4 AL (IF) SDM
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less
than 35 mm.
DA 18-250mm F3.5-6.3 ED AL (IF)
DA 18-270mm F3.5-6.3 ED SDM
FAE 28-70mm F2.8 AL
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less
than 24mm.
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is 28 mm
and the shooting distance is less than 1 m.
FA SOFT 28mm F2.8/
FA SOFT 85mm F2.8
Built-in flash always discharges fully.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262
Setting the Focal Length
The Shake Reduction function operates by obtaining the lens information
such as focal length. Set the focal length when using a lens for which the
focal length information cannot be automatically obtained.
1
Make sure that [Shake Reduction] is activated, and turn
the camera off.
Refer to “Reducing Vertical and Horizontal Camera Shake” (p.116) for
details.
2
3
Attach a lens, and turn the camera on.
The [Input Focal Length] screen appears.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to set
Input Focaal Length
the focal length.
Select from the following focal length
values. (The default setting is 35 mm.)
30
40
35
8
10 12 15 18 20 24 28 30 35
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 100 120
135 150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
550 600 700 800
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
• If the focal length for your lens is not listed above, select the value closest to
the actual focal length (example: [18] for 17 mm and [100] for 105 mm).
• When using a zoom lens, select the actual focal length at the zoom setting
being used in the same manner.
10
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• To change the focal length setting, use [Input Focal Length] in the [A Rec.
Mode 3] menu.
• When using a lens without an s position or a lens with an s position with the
aperture ring set to a position other than s, set [20. Using Aperture Ring] to
[Enable] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu. (p.263)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
263
Using the Aperture Ring
The shutter can be released even if the aperture ring of the D FA, FA, F or
A lens is not set to the s position or a lens without an s position is
attached.
Select [Enable] in [20. Using Aperture Ring]
Using Apertture Ring
20.
of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu.
Disable
Enable
1
2
Shutteer willll releaase when
aperturee ring iss not seett to the
"A" possition
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
The following restrictions apply depending
on the lens being used.
Capture
Lens Used
Mode
Restriction
The aperture remains open regardless of
the aperture ring position. The shutter
speed changes in relation to the open
aperture but an exposure deviation may
occur. [F--] appears for the aperture
indicator.
D FA, FA, F, A, M (lens only
or with automatic
diaphragm accessories
such as auto extension
tube K)
c
D FA, FA, F, A, M, S (with
diaphragm accessories
such as extension tube K)
Pictures can be taken with a specified
aperture value but an exposure
deviation may occur. [F--] appears for
the aperture indicator.
c
c
Manualdiaphragmlenssuch
as reflex lens (lens only)
Pictures can be taken with a specified
aperture value in the manual aperture
range. [F--] appears for the aperture
indicator.
The exposure can be checked with
Optical Preview.
FA SOFT 28mm,
FA SOFT 85mm,
F SOFT 85mm
(lens only)
10
c
a
Pictures can be taken with a set aperture
value and shutter speed. [F--] appears
for the aperture indicator.
All lenses
The exposure can be checked with
Optical Preview.
If the aperture ring is set to a position other than
s, the camera operates in
c
mode regardless of the mode dial setting except when set to
a
or C mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor
If the CMOS sensor becomes dirty or dusty, shadows may appear in the
image in certain situations such as when shooting against a white
background. This indicates that the CMOS sensor must be cleaned.
Removing Dust by Shaking the CMOS Sensor
(Dust Removal)
Shaking the CMOS sensor removes dust from the sensor unit.
1
Select [Dust Removal] in the [R Set-up 4] menu, and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Dust Removal] screen appears.
2
Press the 4 button.
Dust Removal
Dust Removal
Startup AAction
Shutdownn Action
The Dust Removal function is activated
by shaking the CMOS sensor.
To activate the Dust Removal function
every time the camera is turned on and
off, set [Startup Action] and [Shutdown
OK Start
MENU
Action] to O.
When Dust Removal is completed, the
camera returns to the [R Set-up 4] menu.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
265
Removing Dust with a Blower
Raise the mirror up and open the shutter when cleaning the CMOS sensor
with a blower.
Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning as the
CMOS sensor is a precision part. Cleaning services involve a fee.
• The self-timer lamp blinks while cleaning the sensor.
• This camera may generate a vibration sound while cleaning the CMOS
sensor. It is not a malfunction.
• You can use the optional imagesensor cleaning kit to clean the CMOS
sensor.
• Never use a spray blower or a blower with a brush. They may scratch the
CMOS sensor. Also, do not wipe the CMOS sensor with a cloth.
• Do not clean the sensor when the mode dial is set to p.
• To prevent dirt and dust from accumulating on the CMOS sensor, keep the
body mount cover on the camera when a lens is not attached.
• When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to clean
sensor] is displayed on the monitor.
• When cleaning the sensor, use the optional AC adapter kit or install a fully
charged battery. If the battery capacity becomes low during cleaning, the self-
timer lamp blinks rapidly. In this case, stop cleaning immediately.
• Do not put the tip of the blower inside the lens mount area. If the power is
turned off, this may cause damage to the shutter, CMOS sensor and the
mirror.
1
Turn the camera off, and remove the lens.
Turn the camera on.
2
3
10
Select [Sensor Cleaning] in the [R Set-up 4] menu, and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Sensor Cleaning] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266
4
5
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Mirror Up], and press
the 4 button.
Sensor Cleaning
Raises mirror and opens shutter
for acccess to cclean sseensor.
Turn thhe powerr off too ffinish
ġ
The mirror is locked in the up position.
Mirror Up
Cancel
OK OK
Clean the CMOS sensor.
Use a brush-less blower to remove dirt
and dust from the CMOS sensor.
6
7
Turn the camera off.
The mirror automatically returns to its original position.
Attach the lens or body mount cover.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
267
Using the GPS Unit
The following functions are available when the optional GPS unit O-GPS1
is attached to this camera.
Displays the latitude,
N
36°45..410'
longitude, altitude of the
current location, lens
direction and
W140°022.000'
89m
0°
Electronic Compass
Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC) in standby
mode.
05/05/2013
10:00:00
Tracks and captures celestial bodies. By matching the
movement of the camera’s built-in shake reduction unit
with the movement of celestial bodies, celestial bodies
can be captured as individual points even when shooting
with a long exposure setting. (p.268)
ASTROTRACER
GPS Time Sync
Automatically adjusts the camera’s date and time
settings using information acquired from GPS satellites.
• Refer to the manual of the GPS unit for details on how to attach the unit and
information on the unit’s functions.
• To display the electronic compass, press the M button twice in standby
mode and select [Electronic Compass] from the standby mode display
selection screen. (p.29)
“Simple Navigation” cannot be used with this camera.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268
Shooting Celestial Bodies (ASTROTRACER)
1
Select [GPS] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [GPS] screen appears.
2
Select [ASTROTRACER], and
press the four-way controller
GPS
ASTROTRACER
(5).
Calibration
Posittioninng Intteerval
GPS Timee Sync
1min.
The [ASTROTRACER] screen appears.
MENU
3
Select [Action in B Mode], press
the four-way controller (5) to
select V, and press the 4
button.
ASTROTRACER
Action inn B Mode
B
Enables ASTRROTRACER
functiion in BBulb moode to
eliminate sstar trrails dduring
timed exposures at night
The ASTROTRACER function is enabled
when shooting in p mode.
Cancel
OK OK
MENU
To set [Exposure Time], first select the
ON icon for the [Timed Exposure] item in
ASTROTRACER submenu.
4
Press the 3 button three times.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
10
5
6
Set the mode dial to p.
Press the shutter release button fully.
Shooting starts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
269
7
Press the shutter release button fully again.
Exposure ends.
When [Timed Exposure] is enabled, shooting ends automatically after
the set [Exposure Time] has elapsed.
• When you do not want the indicators on the GPS unit to turn on while
shooting with the ASTROTRACER function, you can turn them off by
selecting the OFF icon for [GPS LED Indicators] in Step 3.
• Refer to the manual of the GPS unit for details on ASTROTRACER.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270
Error Messages
Error Messages
Description
The SD Memory Card is full and no more images
can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory Card or
delete unwanted files. (p.52, p.184)
You may be able to save more images if you
change the image capture settings. (p.140)
Memory card full
No image
There are no images that can be played back on
the SD Memory Card.
You are trying to play back an image in a format
not supported by this camera. You may be able
computer.
This image cannot be
displayed
camera. (p.52)
No card in the camera
No Eye-Fi card inserted
Cannot use this card
Images cannot be transferred when an Eye-Fi
card is not inserted. (p.226)
The inserted SD Memory Card is not compatible
with this camera.
There is a problem with the SD Memory Card and
capturing, playing back and transferring images
are not possible. Images on the card may be
viewable on a computer but not with this camera.
Memory card error
The SD Memory Card you have inserted is
unformatted or has been formatted on another
device and is not compatible with this camera.
Use the card after formatting it with this camera.
(p.219)
Card is not formatted
The write-protect switch on an SD Memory Card
you have inserted is locked. Unlock the SD
Memory Card. (p.6)
10
Card is locked
Data is protected by an SD Memory Card
security feature.
Card is electronically locked
This image cannot be
magnified
You are trying to magnify an image that cannot
be magnified.
You are trying to delete an image that is
protected. Remove the protection from the
image. (p.220)
This image is protected
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
271
Error Messages
Description
Not enough battery
power remaining to
activate Pixel Mapping
Appears during Pixel Mapping if the battery level
is insufficient. Install a fully charged battery or
use the optional AC adapter kit.
Not enough battery
power remaining to
clean sensor
Appears during sensor cleaning if the battery
level is insufficient. Install a fully charged battery
or use the optional AC adapter kit.
Not enough battery
power remaining to
update the firmware
Appears when trying to update the firmware if the
battery level is insufficient. Install a fully charged
battery or use the optional AC adapter kit.
Unable to update firmware.
There is a problem with the
firmware update file
Unable to update the firmware. The update file is
damaged. Try downloading the update file again.
The maximum folder number (999) and file
number (9999) are being used, and no more
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory
Card or format the card. (p.219)
Image folder cannot be
created
The image could not be saved because of an SD
Memory Card error.
Unable to store image
Settings not stored
The DPOF settings could not be saved because
the SD Memory Card is full. Delete unwanted
images and perform the DPOF setting again.
(p.184)
The camera was unable to measure the manual
white balance (p.145) or use HDR Capture
(p.149). Try the operation again.
The operation could not be
completed correctly
You cannot select more than the maximum
number of images for Select & Delete (p.184),
Index (p.194), and Eye-Fi Image Transfer
(p.227).
No more images
can be selected
There are no images that can be transferred in
the selected folder. (p.227)
Image not found
10
There are no images that can be processed
No image can be processed using the Digital Filter (p.189) or RAW
Development (p.196) function.
Appears when you try to perform Resize (p.187),
Cropping (p.188), Digital Filter (p.189), or RAW
This image cannot be
Development (p.196) for images captured with
processed
other cameras, or when you try to perform Resize
or Cropping for minimum file size images.
The camera failed
The creation of an index image failed. (p.194)
to create an image
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272
Error Messages
Description
This function is not available You are trying to set a function that is not
in the current mode
available in n, H or C mode.
Camera overheated.
Disabling Live View
temporarily
Live View cannot be used because the camera’s
internal temperature is too high. Try using Live
View again when the camera has cooled down.
to protect circuitry
The camera will turn off because its internal
temperature gets too hot. Leave the camera
turned off and give it enough time to cool down.
Turn it on again after a while.
The camera will turn off
to prevent damage from
overheating
Images cannot be transferred when [Eye-Fi
Communication] is not set to [SELECT] in [Eye-
Fi] of the [R Set-up 2] menu. (p.226)
Set the Eye-Fi communication
to "SELECT"
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
273
Troubleshooting
In rare cases, the camera may not operate correctly due to static
electricity. This can be remedied by taking the battery out and putting it
back in again. After these procedures are done, if the camera operates
correctly, it does not require any repairs.
We recommend checking the following items before contacting a service
center.
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Battery is not
installed
Check if a battery is installed.
The camera
does not turn
on
Check the orientation of battery. Re-insert
battery according to the +/- symbols.
(p.47, p.48)
Battery is not
installed properly
The battery power Replace with a charged battery or use the
is low optional AC adapter kit.
The built-in flash is E blinks while the built-in flash is
charging
charging. Wait until charging is finished.
There is no
Insert an SD Memory Card with available
space or delete unwanted images. (p.73,
p.184)
available space on
the SD Memory
Card
The shutter
cannot be
released
Recording
Wait until recording is finished.
The lens aperture
ring is set to a
Set the lens aperture ring to the s
position or select [Enable] in [20. Using
position other than Aperture Ring] of the [A Custom Setting
s
3] menu. (p.263)
Autofocus cannot work well for subjects
that have low contrast (sky, white walls,
etc.), dark colors, intricate designs,
rapidly-moving objects or scenery shot
through a window or a net-like pattern.
10
Autofocusdoes The subject is
not work
difficult to focus on Lock focus on another object located at
the same distance as your subject, then
aim at the target and press the shutter
release button fully. Alternatively, use
manual focus. (p.110)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Position the subject in the AF area. If the
subject is outside the AF area, aim the
camera at the subject and lock the focus,
then compose a picture and press the
shutter release button fully.
The subject is not in
the AF area
Autofocusdoes
not work
The subject is too
close
Move away from the subject and take a
picture.
The focus mode is Set the focus mode switch to l or A.
set to \
(p.101)
The AE Lock
function does
not operate
p mode is set
AE Lock is not available in p mode.
When the flash
mode is set to C or
Set the flash mode to E (Flash On) or F
(Flash On+Red-eye Reduction). (p.68)
, the flash will
C
The built-in
flash does not
discharge
not discharge if the
subject is bright
K, d, A, Z,
y, U, n, or E of
H mode is set
Select a capture mode other than those
shown to the left. (p.82)
The power
zoom system
The camera does
not have a power
Use manual zoom.
does not work zoom function
The USB
connectionwith The USB
Set [USB Connection] to [MSC] in
a computer
connection mode is [Interface Options] of the [R Set-up 2]
does not work set to [PTP]
properly
menu. (p.233)
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
275
Problem
Cause
The Shake
Reduction function
is off
Remedy
Turn the Shake Reduction function on.
(p.116)
If a lens for which the focal length
The focal length is information cannot be obtained is used,
not set
set the focal length in the [Input Focal
Length] screen. (p.262)
Shake
Reductiondoes
not work
Shutter speed is too
low for the Shake
Reduction function Turn off the Shake Reduction function
to be effective when and use a tripod.
panning or shooting
night scenes, etc.
Move away from the subject, or turn off
tripod.
The subject is too
close
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276
Main Specifications
Model Description
TTL autofocus, auto-exposure SLR digital camera with a built-in
retractable P-TTL flash
Type
PENTAX KAF2 bayonet mount (AF coupler, lens information
contacts, K-mount with power contacts)
Lens Mount
Compatible Lens KAF3, KAF2 (power zoom not compatible), KAF, KA mount lenses
Image Capture Unit
Image Sensor
Primary color filter, CMOS, Size: 23.7 × 15.7 (mm)
Effective Pixels Approx. 16.28 megapixels
Total Pixels
Dust Removal
Sensitivity
Approx. 16.49 megapixels
SP coating and CMOS sensor operations
ISO AUTO: 100 to 51200 (EV steps can be set to 1 EV, 1/2 EV, or
(Standard Output) 1/3 EV)
Image Stabilizer Sensor-shift Shake Reduction
File Formats
Recording Formats RAW (DNG), JPEG (Exif 2.3), DCF2.0 compliant
JPEG: p (4928×3264)
a (3456×2304)
RAW: p (4928×3264)
E (4224×2816)
f (2688×1792)
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
RAW (12bit): DNG
JPEG: C (Best), D (Better), E (Good)
RAW and JPEG simultaneously recordable
Color Space
sRGB, AdobeRGB
SD Memory Cards, SDHC Memory Cards, SDXC Memory Cards
and Eye-Fi Cards
Storage Media
10
Date (100_1018, 100_1019...)/
Storage Folder
PENTX (100PENTX, 101PENTX...); “PENTX” can be changed by
user
Viewfinder
Type
Pentaprism Finder
Coverage (FOV) Approx. 100%
Magnification
Approx. 0.92× (50 mm F1.4 at infinity)
Eye-Relief
Length
Approx. 21.7 mm (from the view window), Approx. 24.5 mm (from
the center of lens)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
277
Diopter Adjustment Approx. -2.5 to +1.5 m-1
Focusing Screen Interchangeable Natural-Bright-Matte III focusing screen
Live View
Type
TTL method using CMOS image sensor
Focusing
Mechanism
Contrast detection: Face Detection, Tracking, Select, Spot
Field of view: approx. 100%, Magnified view (2×, 4×, 6×), Grid
Display (4 × 4 Grid, Golden Section, Scale), Bright/Dark Area
warning, Histogram, Focus Peaking
Display
LCD Monitor
Type
TFT color LCD monitor, wide angle viewing
3.0 inches
Size
Dots
Approx. 921,000 dots
Adjustment
Brightness and colors adjustable
White Balance
Method using a combination of the CMOS sensor and the light-
source detection sensor
Auto
Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Fluorescent Light (D: Daylight Color, N:
Daylight White, W: Cool White, L: Warm White), Tungsten, Flash,
f, Manual, Color Temperature
Preset Modes
Manual
Configuration on monitor (up to 3 settings can be saved),
Color Temperature settings,
Copying the white balance settings of a captured image
Fine Adjustment Adjustable ±7 steps on A-B axis and G-M axis
Focusing System
Type
TTL: phase-matching autofocus
Focus Sensor
SAFOX IXi+, 11 points (9 cross type focus points in the center)
10
Brightness Range EV -1 to 18 (ISO 100)
AF Single (l): Focus priority or shutter priority mode
AF Modes
AF Continuous (k): Focus priority or FPS priority mode
AF Auto (f): Automatically switches between l and k.
Focus Point
Auto (5 AF Points), Auto (11 AF Points), Select (Expanded Area AF
Selection Modes is available), Spot
AF Assist Light
Dedicated LED AF assist light
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278
Exposure Control
TTL open-aperture 77 segment metering
Metering Modes: Multi-segment metering, Center-weighted
metering, Spot metering
Type
Metering Range EV 0 to 22 (ISO100 at 50mm F1.4)
Auto Picture (n), Scene (H), Program (e), Sensitivity
Priority (K), Shutter Priority (b), Aperture Priority (c), Shutter &
Aperture Priority (L), Manual (a), Bulb (p)
Auto Picture modes: automatically selects from Standard, Portrait,
Landscape, Macro, Moving Object, Night Scene Portrait, Night
Exposure Modes Scene, Blue Sky, Forest
Scene modes: Portrait, Landscape, Macro, Moving Object, Night
Scene Portrait, Sunset, Blue Sky, Forest, Night Scene, Night Scene
HDR, Night Snap, Food, Pet, Kids, Surf & Snow, Backlight
Silhouette, Candlelight, Stage Lighting, Museum
* Fixed to JPEG in Night Scene HDR mode.
EV Compensation ±5 EV (1/3 EV steps or 1/2 EV steps can be selected)
AE Lock
Can be assigned to the =/L button from the menu.
Shutter
Type
Electronically controlled vertical-run focal plane shutter
Auto: 1/6000 to 30 seconds, Manual: 1/6000 to 30 seconds (1/3 EV
steps or 1/2 EV steps), Bulb
Shutter Speed
Drive Mode
Single frame, Continuous (Hi, Lo), Self-timer (12 sec., 2 sec.),
Remote Control (0 sec., 3 sec.), Exposure Bracketing (3 frames)
Mode Selection
Approx. 6 fps* (JPEG, Continuous Hi)
Approx. 3 fps* (JPEG, Continuous Lo)
* When the camera is used with the rechargeable lithium-ion
battery D-LI109.
Continuous FPS
Built-in Flash
10
Built-in retractable P-TTL pop-up flash
Type
Guide number: approx. 12 (ISO100/m)
Angle of view coverage: equivalent to 28 mm in 35 mm format
P-TTL, Red-eye Reduction, Slow-speed Sync, Trailing Curtain Sync;
High-speed Sync and Wireless Sync are also available with a
PENTAX dedicated external flash.
Flash Modes
Sync Speed
1/180 sec.
Flash Exposure
Compensation
-2.0 to +1.0 EV
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
279
Capture Functions
Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Radiant, Muted,
Bleach Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome, Cross Processing
Custom Image
Noise Reduction High-ISO NR, Slow Shutter Speed NR
Dynamic Range
Highlight Correction, Shadow Correction
Settings
Lens Correction Distortion Correction, Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction
Digital Filter
Extract Color, Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Shading, Invert Color, Color
Auto, HDR 1, HDR 2, HDR 3
HDR Capture
Auto Align (automatic composition correction)
Exposure Bracket Value: ±1 EV, ±2 EV, ±3 EV
Multi-exposure
Number of shots: 2-9, Exposure adjusted automatically.
Shooting interval: 3 sec. to 24 hr.; Start Interval setting:
immediately, from the set time; Number of shots: up to 999 images
Interval Shooting
Composition
Adjustment
Adjustment range of ±1.0 mm (when rotated: ±0.5 mm) up, down,
left or right; rotating range of ±1 degree
Movie
File Format
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
a (1920×1080, K, 30 fps/25 fps/24 fps),
Recorded Pixels b (1280×720, K, 60 fps/50 fps/30 fps/25 fps/24 fps),
c (640×480, I, 30 fps/25 fps/24 fps)
Quality Level
Sound
C (Best), D (Better), E (Good)
Built-in monaural microphone; recording sound level can be
adjusted.
Up to 25 minutes; automatically stops recording if the internal
temperature of the camera becomes high.
Recording Time
Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Radiant, Muted,
Bleach Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome, Cross Processing
Custom Image
Digital Filter
Extract Color, Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Invert Color, Color
Recording interval: 3 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min.,
10 min., 30 min., 1 hr.; Recording time: 4 sec. to 99 hr.; Start
Interval setting: immediately, from the set time
10
Interval Movie
* The file format is Motion JPEG (AVI).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280
Playback Functions
Single frame, multi-image display (4, 9, 16, 36, and 81 thumbnails),
display magnification (up to 16×, scrollable, quick zoom), image
rotation, histogram display (Y histogram, RGB histogram), bright/
dark area warning, detailed information display, copyright
information display (photographer, copyright holder), GPS data
(latitude, longitude, altitude, direction, Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC)), folder display, calendar filmstrip display, slideshow,
wireless image transfer with Eye-Fi
Playback View
Single image, all images, select & delete, folder, instant review
image
Delete
Monochrome, Extract Color, Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast,
Shading, Invert Color, Color, Tone Expansion, Sketch, Water Color,
Pastel, Posterization, Miniature, Soft, Starburst, Fish-eye, Slim,
Base Parameter Adj
Digital Filter
File Format (JPEG), Image Capture Settings (Aspect Ratio,
Recorded Pixels, Quality Level, Color Space), Lens Correction
(Distortion Correction, Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction),
Custom Image, White Balance, Sensitivity, High-ISO NR, Shadow
Correction
RAW
Development
Resize, Cropping (aspect ratio can be changed and tilt correction is
available), Index, Movie Edit (divide or delete selected frames),
Capturing a JPEG still picture from a movie, Save RAW data (if
JPEG data is available in buffer memory)
Edit
Customization
USER Mode
Up to 2 user-defined settings can be saved.
Custom
Functions
20 items
Mode Memory
12 items
E-Dial
Programming
Electronic dials (front/rear): customizable to each exposure mode.
|/Y button: One Push File Format, Exposure Bracketing,
Optical Preview, Digital Preview, Composition Adjustment, AF
Active Area
Button
Customization
10
=/L button: Enable AF1, Enable AF2, Cancel AF, AE Lock
Text Size
Standard, Large
World Time
World Time settings for 75 cities (28 time zones)
AF Fine
Adjustment
±10 steps, adjustment for all lenses or individual lenses (up to 20
can be saved)
Copyright
Information
Names of “Photographer” and “Copyright Holder” are embedded to
the image file.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
281
Power Supply
Battery Type
AC Adapter
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109 or
AA battery holder D-BH109 with four AA batteries (lithium, Ni-MH
rechargeable, alkaline)
* Either one of these is provided with the camera. The provided
power supply varies depending on the country or region where the
camera was purchased. The item not provided with the camera is
optionally available.
AC Adapter kit K-AC128 (optional)
<With D-LI109>
Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx. 410 images,
(without flash usage): approx. 480 images
Playback time: approx. 270 minutes
<With AA battery holder D-BH109 with four AA lithium batteries>
Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx.710
images, (without flash usage): approx. 1250 images
Playback time: approx.560 minutes
Battery Life
*
Tested in compliance with CIPA standard using a new
rechargeable lithium-ion battery/new AA lithium batteries
under the temperature at 23°C. Actual results may vary
depending on the shooting conditions/circumstances.
Interfaces
USB 2.0 (high-speed compatible), AV output terminal, Cable
release terminal
Connection Port
USB Connection MSC/PTP
Video Output
NTSC/PAL
Format
Dimensions and Weight
Approx. 129.0 mm (W) × 96.5 mm (H) × 70.0 mm (D) (excluding the
hot shoe, operation parts and other protrusions)
Dimensions
Approx. 650g (loaded and ready with the dedicated rechargeable
lithium-ion battery and SD Memory Card); Approx. 675g (loaded
and ready with four AA lithium batteries and SD Memory Card);
Approx. 590 g (body only)
10
Weight
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282
Accessories
USB Cable I-USB7, Strap O-ST132, Rechargeable Lithium-ion
Battery D-LI109*, Battery Charger D-BC109*, AC plug cord*,
Software (CD-ROM) S-SW133
Package
Contents
* Depending on the country and region where the camera was
purchased, these items are replaced with the AA Battery Holder
D-BH109 and AA lithium batteries.
<Mounted on the camera>
Eyecup FR, Hot shoe cover FK, Body mount cover
Software
SILKYPIX Developer Studio 3.0 LE
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback Time
When using the fully charged battery or new AA batteries
Flash Photography
Normal
Shooting
Playback
Time
Battery
Temperature
50% Use 100% Use
23°C
0°C
480
360
410
300
710
360
250
500
270 minutes
210 minutes
560 minutes
D-LI109
*1
AA lithium batteries
23°C
1250
AA Ni-MH
rechargeable
batteries (1900mAh)
23°C
23°C
580
170
380
100
290
70
300 minutes
AA alkaline batteries
240 minutes
The image storage capacity (normal recording and flash use 50%) is based on
measuring conditions in accordance with CIPA standards, while other data is based
on our measuring conditions. Some deviation from the above figures may occur in
actual use depending on the selected capture mode and shooting conditions.
*1 Tested using the Energizer Ultimate Lithium Batteries.
Approximate Image Storage Capacity by Size
10
When using a 2 GB SD Memory Card
JPEG Quality
Recorded Pixels
RAW
C
214
D
379
E
p (4928×3264)
E (4224×2816)
a (3456×2304)
f (2688×1792)
749
76
—
—
—
289
512
1007
1463
2363
429
758
706
1229
The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting
conditions, selected capture mode and SD Memory Card, etc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
283
Index
Accessories ............................18
Adding the date (DPOF) .......230
AdobeRGB ...........................142
AE Lock ..................................96
AE Metering ............................97
AF coupler ..............................19
AF Fine Adjustment ..............112
AF frame ...........................65, 67
k .....................................103
l .....................................102
=/L button ....21, 101, 167
Alkaline batteries ....................48
Aperture Priority Automatic
Exposure mode c .................89
Aspect Ratio .................130, 188
.........................................64, 83
Auto Flash Discharge .............68
Symbols
[A Rec. Mode] menu .... 77, 252
[C Movie] menu .... 79, 129, 255
[Q Playback] menu .... 175, 256
[R Set-up] menu ......... 204, 256
[A Custom Setting] menu
....................................... 80, 257
Q (Playback) button
................................... 21, 23, 72
d (Green) button ................... 20
E (Flash pop-up) button ... 21, 71
m (EV Compensation) button
................................... 20, 23, 92
U Standard ........................... 83
c Portrait ........................ 83, 84
s Landscape .................. 83, 84
b Macro .......................... 83, 84
\ Moving Object ............. 83, 84
. Night Scene Portrait ... 83, 84
K Sunset ....................... 83, 84
d Blue Sky .................... 83, 84
x Forest ......................... 83, 84
A Night Scene ...................... 84
Z Night Scene HDR ............ 84
l Night Snap ........................ 84
K Food .................................. 84
Z Pet .................................... 84
R Kids .................................... 84
Q Surf & Snow ..................... 84
y Backlight Silhouette ......... 84
U Candlelight ........................ 85
n Stage Lighting .................. 85
E Museum ........................... 85
C Movie .............................. 131
Auto Power Off .....................214
c (Aperture Priority Automatic
Exposure) mode .....................89
AV device .............................200
10
B
p (Bulb Exposure) mode .......91
Backlight Silhouette y ..........84
Base Parameter Adj (Digital
Filter) ....................................190
Battery ....................................45
Battery type ..........................214
A
AA batteries ........................... 48
AC adapter ............................. 50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284
Bleach Bypass (Custom Image)
............................................. 155
Blue Sky d .................... 83, 84
Body mount cover .................. 54
Bracketing shooting ............... 93
Bright (Custom Image) ......... 155
Bright areas ........................... 34
Bright/Dark Area warning
..................................... 176, 212
Brightness adjustment ......... 148
Built-in flash ........................... 68
Bulb shooting ......................... 91
Button Customization ........... 162
Contrast AF ..........................106
Contrast Control Sync ..........250
Contrast detection AF ...........101
Control panel ....................28, 38
Copyright Holder ..................224
Correcting distortion .............151
Creating new folders ............222
Cropping images ..................188
Image) ..................................155
f (White Balance) ...........143
Custom Image ......................155
[A Custom Setting] menu
C
D
Cable release terminal ........... 19
Calendar Filmstrip Display ... 179
Camera shake ............. 116, 130
Candlelight U ........................ 85
Capture mode ........................ 82
Card access lamp .................. 19
Catch-in Focus ..................... 113
CD-ROM .............................. 235
Center-weighted metering ..... 97
Charging the battery .............. 45
City ....................................... 209
Cleaning the sensor ............. 264
Cloudy (White Balance) ....... 143
Color (Digital Filter) ...... 159, 189
Color Space ......................... 142
Color Temperature (White
Dark areas ..............................34
Date Adjustment .....................60
Daylight (White Balance) ......143
Default settings .....................252
U/i (Delete) button .......23, 73
Deleting ..........................73, 184
Deleting a single image ..........73
Deleting all images ...............186
Destination ...........................207
Detailed Information Display
...............................................31
Developing RAW images
Digital Filter ..................159, 189
Digital Preview ......................115
Diopter adjustment .................56
Diopter adjustment lever
.........................................19, 56
Direct keys ................37, 76, 252
Display Color ........................210
Display language ....................58
Distortion ..............................151
DNG .....................................141
DPOF ...................................229
D-Range Settings .................149
10
Balance) ............................... 147
Composition Adjustment ...... 153
Compression ratio ................ 142
Computer ............................. 231
Connection cable cover ... 19, 50
Continuous mode k
............................................. 103
Continuous playback ........... 181
Continuous Shooting ........... 122
Contrast (Custom Image) .... 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
285
Drive Mode ............................ 76
DST ................................ 59, 207
Dust Removal ...................... 264
Dynamic Range ................... 148
Firmware Info/Options ..........218
Fish-eye (Digital Filter) .........190
Flash ...............................68, 239
Flash (White Balance) ..........143
Flash Exposure Compensation
...............................................70
Flash On .................................68
E (Flash pop-up) button ...21, 71
Fluorescent Light (White
Balance) ...............................143
Focus indicator .......................65
Focus lock ..............................65
Focus Peaking ......................111
Focusing ...............................101
Focusing point ......................104
Focusing ring ........................110
Focus-priority ................102, 103
Folder Display ......................178
Folder Name .........................221
Format ..................................219
Four-way controller (2345)
.............................22, 23, 37, 76
Framerate .............................130
E
E-dial .................................... 162
E-Dial Programming ............ 162
Electronic Compass ....... 29, 267
Enlarge Instant Review ........ 212
Error messages ................... 270
EV Compensation .................. 92
m (EV Compensation) button
................................... 20, 23, 92
Exif ....................................... 224
Expanded Area AF .............. 105
Exposure ................................ 87
Exposure Bracket Value ...... 150
Exposure Bracketing .............. 93
Exposure modes .............. 86, 89
Exposure setting for movies
............................................. 129
External flash ....................... 243
Extract Color (Digital Filter)
..................................... 159, 189
Eyecup ................................... 56
Eye-Fi card .......................... 226
Eye-Fi Image Transfer ......... 227
F
Face Detection (Contrast AF)
............................................. 106
File Format ........................... 141
File Name ............................ 223
File naming system .............. 142
File number .................. 216, 224
Filter ..................................... 159
Filter Effect (Custom Image)
............................................. 157
Fine Sharpness (Custom Image)
............................................. 157
Firmware .............................. 218
10
G
GPS ......................................267
GPS Time Sync ....................267
Green Button ..................20, 162
Guide Display .........83, 162, 210
Guide indicators .....................34
Guide number .......................242
H
HDR Capture ........................149
High Contrast (Digital Filter)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286
..................................... 159, 189
High Dynamic Range Image
K
Kelvin ....................................147
Kids R ....................................84
Capture ................................ 149
High/Low Key Adjustment
L
(Custom Image) ................... 157
High-ISO NR .......................... 98
Highlight Correction ............. 148
High-speed Sync ................. 245
Histogram Display
................................. 30, 33, 212
Hometown ............................ 207
Hot shoe ................................ 19
Hue (Custom Image) ........... 157
Landscape s ...................83, 84
Landscape (Custom Image)
.............................................155
Language setting ....................58
Language/u .......................58
Lateral chromatic aberration
.............................................151
LCD color tuning ...................211
LCD Monitor ...........................24
Lens ................................54, 259
Lens Correction ....................151
Lens information contacts ......19
Lens mount cover ...................54
Lens mount index .............19, 55
Lens unlock button ...........21, 55
Lens with aperture ring .........263
Lithium batteries .....................48
Locking the exposure .............96
Long exposure ........................91
U/i (Live View/Delete) button
I
Image Capture Settings ....... 140
Image finishing tone ............. 155
Image plane indicator ............ 19
Image Rotation .................... 183
Image storage capacity
............................................. 282
Index image ......................... 194
M button
..................... 21, 23, 24, 30, 179
Info Overlay ......................... 107
Initial settings ......................... 58
Initializing a memory card .... 219
Input Focal Length ............... 262
Installing software ................ 235
Instant Review ............... 66, 212
Interface Options ......... 201, 233
Interval Movie ...................... 133
Interval Shooting .................. 124
Invert Color (Digital Filter)
M
10
a (Manual Exposure) mode ...89
Macintosh .............................232
Macro b ...........................83, 84
Magnifying images .......109, 177
Main switch .................20, 23, 57
Manual Exposure mode a .....89
Manual focus \ .................110
Manual White Balance .........145
Matte field .............................110
Memory ................................215
..................................... 159, 189
ISO sensitivity ........................ 87
J
JPEG ................................... 141
JPEG Quality ....................... 142
JPEG Recorded Pixels ........ 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
287
Memory card .......................... 52
3 button ............ 22, 23, 39
Menu display ........................ 213
Menu operation ...................... 39
Meter operating time .............. 97
\ (Manual focus) .............. 110
Microphones .......................... 19
Miniature (Digital Filter) ........ 190
Mired .................................... 147
Mode dial ......................... 21, 82
Monitor ................................. 211
Monitor display ....................... 24
Monochrome (Custom Image)
............................................. 155
Monochrome (Digital Filter)
............................................. 189
Movie ................................... 129
Movie Capture Settings ....... 129
Movie Edit ............................ 137
[C Movie] menu .... 79, 129, 255
Movie SR ............................. 130
MSC ..................................... 233
Multi-exposure ..................... 127
Multiple flash shooting ......... 249
Multi-segment metering ......... 97
Muted (Custom Image) ........ 155
O
4 button ................21, 23, 105
One-Push Bracketing .............95
One Push File Format ..........166
Optical Preview ....................114
Output format .......................201
P
e (Program Automatic
Exposure) mode .....................89
PAL .......................................201
Pastel (Digital Filter) .............190
Pet Z .....................................84
Pixel Mapping .......................213
Pixels ............................130, 141
Playback .................................72
Q (Playback) button
...................................21, 23, 72
Playback Info Display .............30
[Q Playback] menu .....175, 256
Playback mode palette
Playback time .......................282
Playing back movies .............135
Portrait c .........................83, 84
Portrait (Custom Image) .......155
Posterization (Digital Filter)
Power .....................................57
Preview .................................114
Printing .................................229
Program Automatic Exposure
mode e ..................................89
Protect ..................................220
Provided software .................235
PTP ......................................233
P-TTL ...................................244
N
10
Natural (Custom Image) ...... 155
Night Scene A ...................... 84
Night Scene HDR Z ............ 84
Night Scene Portrait . ... 83, 84
Night Snap l ........................ 84
Ni-MH rechargeable batteries
............................................... 48
Noise Reduction .................... 98
NTSC ................................... 201
Q
Quality Level .................130, 142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288
Quick Zoom ......................... 176
...............................................89
Sensor Cleaning ...................265
[R Set-up] menu ..........204, 256
Shade (White Balance) ........143
Shading (Digital Filter)
.....................................159, 189
Shadow Correction ...............148
Shake Reduction ..................116
.............................................157
Shooting celestial bodies ......268
Shooting Info Display .............29
Shooting information ..............24
R
Radiant (Custom Image) ...... 155
RAW .................................... 141
RAW Development ...... 196, 235
V/Y button .............. 21, 165
Rear e-dial (S) ............ 21, 23
[A Rec. Mode] menu .... 77, 252
Recorded Pixels ........... 130, 141
Recording Sound Level ....... 130
Red-eye reduction ................. 68
Release .................................. 66
Release-priority .................... 102
Remote Control .................... 120
Remote control receiver
Shutter Priority Automatic
....................................... 19, 121
Reset ................................... 217
Resize .................................. 187
Retro (Digital Filter) ...... 159, 189
Reversal Film (Custom Image)
............................................. 155
RGB Histogram Display ... 30, 33
Rotation ............................... 183
Exposure mode b .................89
Shutter release button
...................................20, 23, 65
SILKYPIX Developer Studio
.............................................235
Single image display ........30, 72
Sketch (Digital Filter) ............189
Slideshow .............................181
Slim (Digital Filter) ................190
Slow Shutter Speed NR .......100
Software .......................218, 235
Sound Effects .......................206
Speaker ..................................19
Specifications .......................276
Spot (Contrast AF) ...............106
Spot metering .........................97
sRGB ....................................142
Stage Lighting n ...................85
Standard U ............................83
Standard Information Display
...............................................30
Standby mode ........................24
S
Saturation (Custom Image)
............................................. 157
Save Cross Processing ....... 158
Save RAW Data ............. 72, 212
Save Settings ....................... 168
Scene mode H ................... 84
SD Memory Card ........... 52, 219
Select (Contrast AF)
10
............................................. 106
Select & Delete .................... 184
Self-timer ............................. 118
Self-timer lamp ............... 19, 119
Sensitivity ....................... 87, 197
Sensitivity Priority (Automatic
Exposure) mode K
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
289
Starburst (Digital Filter) ........ 190
Status screen ......................... 25
Strap ...................................... 44
Sunset K ....................... 83, 84
Surf & Snow Q ..................... 84
K (Sensitivity Priority Automatic
Exposure) mode
Viewfinder .........................35, 56
Volume .........................130, 206
W
Water Color (Digital Filter)
.............................................189
White Balance ......................143
Windows ...............................232
Wireless Mode ................68, 246
World Time ...........................207
Write-protect .............................6
............................................... 89
T
L (Shutter & Aperture Priority
Automatic Exposure) ............. 89
Temperature warning ............. 27
Terminal cover ....................... 19
Thumbnail display ................ 179
Tone Expansion (Digital Filter)
............................................. 189
Toning (Custom Image) ....... 157
Toy Camera (Digital Filter)
Z
Zoom lens ...............................65
..................................... 159, 189
Tracking (Contrast AF)
............................................. 106
Trailing Curtain Sync ............. 68
Tripod socket ......................... 19
TTL phase-matching autofocus
............................................. 101
Tungsten (White Balance) ... 143
Exposure) mode .................... 89
10
U
Updating software ................ 218
USB Connection .................. 233
USER mode ......................... 168
User registration .................. 237
V
Vibrant (Custom Image) ....... 155
Video terminal ...................... 200
VIDEO/PC output terminal
..................................... 200, 234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290
WARRANTY POLICY
All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide
photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of
material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date of
purchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced
without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does not
show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering,
battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions,
or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its
authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations
except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for
damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential
damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or
workmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of
the manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties,
whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts
as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by non-
authorized PENTAX service facilities.
Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period
should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment
or to the manufacturer. If there are no representatives of the manufacturer
in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage
prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before the
equipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs
procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will
be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be
returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is not
covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its
representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.
If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to
have it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing
fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that
country. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer
will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty
policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance
fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase when
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
291
required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of your
equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing,
please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized
representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it
directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service
charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the
service station to proceed with the servicing.
• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory
rights.
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in
some countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we
recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with your
product at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor
in your country for more information and to receive a copy of the
warranty policy.
10
The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European
Union.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292
For customers in USA
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
10
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply.
The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material,
which may require special handling.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
293
Declaration of Conformity
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals
We:
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING AMERICAS
CORPORATION
Located at: 633 17th Street, Suite 2600
Denver, Colorado 80202 U.S.A.
Phone: 800-877-0155 FAX: 303-790-1131
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein
complies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital
device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested
and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained
continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be
within the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on the
statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above
named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies with
the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.
Product Name: Digital Camera
Model Number: K-500
10
Contact person: Customer Service Manager
Date and Place: May, 2013, Colorado
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old
Equipment and Used Batteries
1. In the European Union
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or
accompanying documents mean that used electrical and
electronic equipment and batteries should not be mixed with
general household waste.
Used electrical/electronic equipment and batteries must be
treated separately and in accordance with legislation that
requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of these
products.
By disposing of these products correctly you will help ensure
that the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery
and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the
environment and human health which could otherwise arise
due to inappropriate waste handling.
If a chemical symbol is added beneath the symbol shown above, in
accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal
(Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in the battery at a
concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery
Directive.
For more information about collection and recycling of used products,
please contact your local authorities, your waste disposal service or the
point of sale where you purchased the products.
2. In other countries outside the EU
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard
used products, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for
the correct method of disposal.
10
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be returned free
of charge to the dealer, even when you don’t purchase a new product.
Further collection facilities are listed on the home page of www.swico.ch
or www.sens.ch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING CO., LTD.
2-35-7, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN
(http://www.pentax.jp)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING 112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,
FRANCE S.A.S.
FRANCE
(European Headquarters) (HQ - http://www.pentax.eu)
(France - http://www.pentax.fr)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg,
DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
GERMANY
(http://www.pentax.de)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks
UK LTD.
SL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING 633 17th Street, Suite 2600, Denver, Colorado 80202,
AMERICAS CORPORATION U.S.A.
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING 1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,
CANADA INC.
CANADA
(http://www.pentax.ca)
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING 23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,
CHINA CO., LTD.
Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032, CHINA
(http://www.pentax.com.cn)
http://www.pentax.jp/english
• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
53780
Copyright © PENTAX RICOH IMAGING CO., LTD. 2013
R01DTE13 Printed in Philippines
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Pentair Swimming Pool Heater Pump User Manual
Philco Crafts DVD Player PVD1000 User Manual
Philips Baby Toy SBC SC 364 User Manual
Philips Car Satellite TV System 32PFL3406 User Manual
Philips CRT Television 15PT2526 User Manual
Philips Indoor Furnishings 31603 31 16 User Manual
Pioneer Stereo System CDX FM1287 User Manual
Porter Cable Portable Generator BSI550 User Manual
Poulan Trimmer 530086997 User Manual
Premier Heat Pump PHP HWC 150 User Manual